JP2016026699A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest of a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first notice execution means for executing a first notice for noticing a possibility of derivation of a specific display result in variable display by holding storage by displaying hold information corresponding to the holding storage to be determined for a determination result in a special mode differing from a predetermined mode; and second notice execution means for executing a second notice for noticing a possibility of derivation of a specific display result in variable display by the holding storage by executing a continuous performance that continues over a plurality of times of variable display before execution of variable display based on the holding storage to be determined for the determination result. The second notice execution means can execute a suggestive performance for suggesting execution/non-execution of the second notice, before starting the second notice and limits execution of the second notice during execution of the first notice.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived as a display result.

  As a conventional gaming machine, variable display that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the start area is stored as reserved storage within a predetermined upper limit storage number, and variable based on the reserved storage It is determined whether or not the display result of the display is the specific display result before the variable display based on the hold memory is started, and corresponding to the hold memory that is a determination target of the determination result according to the determination result. By displaying the hold information in a special mode different from the predetermined mode, the pre-reading notice effect (first notice) of the hold display for notifying the possibility that the specific display result is derived in the variable display by the hold memory, and the determination result Specified in variable display by hold memory by performing continuous production over a plurality of variable displays before variable display based on hold memory that is subject to determination The possibility of starting the pre-reading notice effect of the mode transition in the change in which the pre-reading notice effect of the mode transition (second notice) for notifying the possibility that the display result is derived and the mode pre-reading notice effect is not executed. It is possible to execute a suggestive squealing effect (suggesting effect), and these squeezing effects are higher when the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display is executed than when the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display is not executed. Some are executed at a rate (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-206464 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the suggestion effect is executed at a high rate during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect (first notice) of the “hold display”. A pre-reading advance notice of the “mode change” is made when the player is informed beforehand that the pre-reading notice effect (second notice) of the “mode change” for the reserved memory that is the target of the advance notice is executed. There is a problem that the production effect of the production (second notice) is remarkably lowered and the interest of the game is lowered.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the interest of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A game machine (pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous to a player when a variable display is performed and a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived as a display result Machine 1),
Reservation storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B) for storing information relating to the variable display that has not yet been started as a storage,
Reservation display means (for example, start winning storage display area 5H in the effect display device 5) for displaying each hold storage stored in the hold storage means as hold information in a predetermined manner (for example, display of “●”). When,
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result before the variable display based on the hold storage is started (for example, A portion where the CPU 103 performs random number determination processing at the time of winning)
Depending on the determination result of the specific determination means, the hold information corresponding to the hold memory that is the determination target of the determination result is displayed in a special mode (for example, “♦”) different from the predetermined mode. Thus, first notice execution means (production control CPU 120 for executing the first notice (for example, pre-reading notice effect of “hold display”) for notifying the possibility that the specific display result is derived in the variable display by the hold storage. In step S809 of the prefetching notice process, after the prefetching notice effect is determined to be the prefetching notice effect of “hold display”, the prefetching notice effect pattern of “hold display” is determined in step S812, and the hold display notice update control is performed in step S813. To implement)
According to the determination result of the specific determination means, by performing a continuous effect over a plurality of variable displays before the variable display based on the hold memory that is the determination target of the determination result is performed, Second notice executing means for executing a second notice (for example, a pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift”) for notifying the possibility that the specific display result is derived in the variable display by holding storage (the effect control CPU 120 pre-reads notice) In step S809 of the process, the pre-reading notice effect is determined as the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift”, and the pre-reading notice effect setting process is performed),
With
The second notice execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a hit effect) suggesting the execution of the second notice before starting the second notice, and executing the suggestion effect. The second notice can be executed even when the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted (the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of step S754 of the turn effect determination process). To change the production control pattern of the variable display and determine the production non-execution pattern),
The second notice execution means does not execute a new second notice when the second notice is being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the gaming machine from deteriorating.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A prohibiting unit that prohibits execution of the first notice by the first notice executing unit and the second notice by the second notice executing unit;
It is characterized by that.

A gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein
When the second notice is executed, the specific display result is more likely to be derived than when the first notice is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. Expectation degree P3 that is a big hit / accuracy / small win in the pre-reading notice effect is larger than an expected degree P2 that is a big hit / accurate / small win in the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display”),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's sense of expectation for the second notice can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, claim 2, and means 1,
The second notice execution means starts the second notice without executing the suggestion effect when executing the second notice during the execution of the first notice (for example, in the production effect determination process, When the control CPU 120 determines in the process of step S753 that the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the part of executing the process of step S754),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the second notice is executed even during the execution of the first notice, compared to the case where the second notice itself is not executed in order to limit the suggestive effect during the execution of the first notice, Improve the fun of gaming machines.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, claim 2, means 1, and means 2,
The variable display means has identification information (for example, a first special figure) based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a first start area (for example, a first start prize opening) provided in the game area. That the game medium has passed through the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) for performing variable display and the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening) provided in the game area. Second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B) for performing variable display of the identification information (for example, the second special figure) based on,
The hold storage means stores hold storage information relating to variable display hold storage that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the first start area or the second start area within a predetermined upper limit storage number range. (For example, when the CPU 103 determines that the number of first special figure reserved memory is not the upper limit in the process of step S202 of the start winning determination process, or the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit in the process of step S204) In addition, in the process of step S210, the random number value is stored in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value),
Advantageous state control means for controlling one of a plurality of advantageous states having different advantages for the player as the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 is determined in step S244 of the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process). Based on the jackpot type, the process for pre-opening the big hit in step S114, the process during the big hit release in step S115, the post-hit opening process in step S116, and the big hit end process in step S117),
Variable display control means for executing the variable display of the identification information by the second variable display means in preference to the variable display of the identification information by the first variable display means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal process in step S231). In the processing, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number is 0 before determining whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the second special figure reserved memory number is not zero. When the determination is made, the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the special symbol variation process in step S112, and the special symbol stop process in step S113),
With
The start time determining means determines whether to control to the advantageous state based on the hold storage information of the hold storage read from the hold storage means when starting variable display based on the hold storage (for example, the CPU 103 In the processing of step S241 of the special symbol normal processing, the random number MR1 is a part for determining whether or not the random hit value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination value), or which one of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled (for example, the CPU 103 has the special symbol) In the process of step S243 of the normal process, a portion for determining the jackpot type based on the random value MR2) is further determined,
The specific determination unit also determines which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to be controlled by the start time determining unit (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the winning random number value determination process includes step S405). , Step S410 is executed to determine “15 round big hit”, “surprise big hit”, “small hit”, or “out of”)
The second notice execution means is based on a determination result of the specific determination means, and is in an advantageous state of a predetermined type (for example, “15 round big hit”, “surprise big hit”) among the plurality of types of advantageous states. A second notice (for example, a pre-reading notice effect in the “priority notice mode” or “15 round notice mode”) is executed, and the identification by the game medium passing through the first start area is performed. The game medium passes through the second start area after the execution of the second notice is started based on the determination result of the determination means and before the variable display based on the hold memory that is the target of the determination result is started. If the determination result of the specific determination means is a determination result indicating that it is controlled to an advantageous state different from the type to be notified of the second notice being executed, the second notice being executed is canceled. Thus, a special notice for notifying that there is a possibility of being controlled in any of the plurality of advantageous states is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode in the process of step S732 of the mode transition notice setting process). Based on the determination that the flag is turned on, a change setting to the common notice A mode is performed in step S735 or a change setting to the common notice B mode is executed in step S736. In the process of S553 ′, the pre-reading notice effect of the “common notice A mode” or the “common notice B mode” shown in FIG. 45 is used in place of the “predictive notice mode” or “15-round notice mode”. Run)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the second variable display means for which the variable display is prioritized is executed during execution of the second notice, the determination by the specific determination means regarding the variable display of the second variable display means. If the result is a determination result indicating that the advantageous state is controlled to be different from the type to be notified of the second notice being executed, the second notice being executed is canceled and the special notice is executed. It is possible to maintain the consistency of the contents and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, claim 2, means 1, and means 2,
The variable display means has identification information (for example, a first special figure) based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through a first start area (for example, a first start prize opening) provided in the game area. That the game medium has passed through the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) for performing variable display and the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening) provided in the game area. Second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B) for performing variable display of the identification information (for example, the second special figure) based on,
The hold storage means stores hold storage information relating to variable display hold storage that has not yet started even though the game medium has passed through the first start area or the second start area within a predetermined upper limit storage number range. (For example, when the CPU 103 determines that the number of first special figure reserved memory is not the upper limit in the process of step S202 of the start winning determination process, or the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit in the process of step S204) In addition, in the process of step S210, the random number value is stored in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value),
Advantageous state control means for controlling one of a plurality of advantageous states having different advantages for the player as the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 is determined in step S244 of the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process). Based on the jackpot type, the process for pre-opening the big hit in step S114, the process during the big hit release in step S115, the post-hit opening process in step S116, and the big hit end process in step S117),
Variable display control means for executing the variable display of the identification information by the second variable display means in preference to the variable display of the identification information by the first variable display means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal process in step S231). In the processing, it is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number is 0 before determining whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the second special figure reserved memory number is not zero. When the determination is made, the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the special symbol variation process in step S112, and the special symbol stop process in step S113),
With
The start time determining means determines whether to control to the advantageous state based on the hold storage information of the hold storage read from the hold storage means when starting variable display based on the hold storage (for example, the CPU 103 In the processing of step S241 of the special symbol normal processing, the random number MR1 is a part for determining whether or not the random hit value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination value), or which one of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled (for example, the CPU 103 has the special symbol) In the process of step S243 of the normal process, a portion for determining the jackpot type based on the random value MR2) is further determined,
The specific determination unit also determines which of the plurality of types of advantageous states to be controlled by the start time determining unit (for example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the winning random number value determination process includes step S405). , Step S410 is executed to determine “15 round big hit”, “surprise big hit”, “small hit”, or “out of”)
The second notice execution means is based on a determination result of the specific determination means, and is in an advantageous state of a predetermined type (for example, “15 round big hit”, “surprise big hit”) among the plurality of types of advantageous states. A second notice (for example, a pre-reading notice effect in the “priority notice mode” or “15 round notice mode”) is executed, and the identification by the game medium passing through the first start area is performed. The game medium passes through the second start area after the execution of the second notice is started based on the determination result of the determination means and before the variable display based on the hold memory that is the target of the determination result is started. If the determination result of the specific determination means is a determination result indicating that it is controlled to an advantageous state different from the type to be notified of the second notice being executed, the second notice being executed is continued. After the execution of the second notice, a special effect for notifying that the advantageous state of the kind different from the kind notified in the second notice is controlled is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 Based on the determination that the special effect flag is turned on in the process of step S7320 of the mode transition advance notice setting process, the special effect execution setting is performed in the process of step S7322, so that the 54) after the pre-reading notice effect of “notice mode” or “15 round notice mode”),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the second variable display means for which the variable display is prioritized is executed during execution of the second notice, the determination by the specific determination means regarding the variable display of the second variable display means. If the result is a determination result indicating that the advantageous state is controlled to be different from the type to be notified in the second notice being executed, the special effect is finally executed, and thus the notice content becomes inconsistent. Since it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness while preventing this, the game interest can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in Embodiment 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the variation aspect of the production symbol implemented when a display result becomes disagreement in a production | presentation display apparatus, a front variation pattern, and a back variation pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between the variation mode of the effect symbol implemented when a display result becomes a big hit in an effect display device, a front variation pattern, and a back variation pattern, (A) is an effect display device. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the variation aspect of the production | presentation symbol implemented when a display result becomes a small hit or suddenness, a front variation pattern, and a back variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table after a loss. (A)-(C) is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (normal time). (A)-(C) are figures which show the example of a structure of the fluctuation pattern determination table before loss time (during time-short control). (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the fluctuation pattern determination table after big hit, (B) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the fluctuation pattern judgment table before big hit, (C) It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the fluctuation pattern determination table after a hit, (D) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the fluctuation pattern determination table before sudden / small hit. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the random number used with an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice process. It is a figure which shows the example of the prefetch notice classification determination ratio. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of second start winning interrupt determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example which the interruption of a fluctuation display generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of mode change conditions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a roaring effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the turn production execution decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mode transition advance notice setting process. (A) is a figure which shows the example of the pre-reading notice mode determination ratio, (B) is a figure which shows the example of the notice effect pattern determination ratio in common notice B mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation process during fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of an execution which performs a rolling effect and transfers mode. It is a figure which shows the execution example which performs a whirling effect and does not change mode. It is a figure which shows the example of execution which transfers a mode, without performing a roaring effect. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of prefetch notice effect. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of second start winning interrupt determination processing according to the second embodiment. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of special production conditions. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mode transition advance notice setting process. (A) is a figure which shows the example which shows prefetch notice mode decision ratio, (B) is a figure which shows a special effect pattern decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation process during fluctuation display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of execution of a special effect. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a special effect.

  Hereinafter, Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light-emitting diodes) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (variable display (also referred to as variable display)). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, a number indicating “0” to “9” and a symbol indicating “−”), and the type may be different. May be different. Further, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, “00” to “99”. .

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, the first special symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 4 </ b> A and the second special symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 4 </ b> B in the special symbol game are respectively supported. For example, in the effect symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display parts such as three, effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, changes in the effect symbols (eg, vertical scroll display) are started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variation display result in the special symbol game, in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. Then, the finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the result of variation display of the production symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the game, a variable display effect of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite effect symbol that is the result of the variable display is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, to display various display symbols such as special symbols and effect symbols is to display the display symbols in a stopped state (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) to end the variable display. On the other hand, during the variation display from the start of the variation display of the production symbol to the display of the definite production symbol that is the variation display result, the variation rate of the production symbol becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not deterministically displayed, the player can recognize that the variation of the effect symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include a complete stop display of the effect symbol for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  There are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters) that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be any combination of numbers, English letters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images may be, for example, people, animals, other objects, or , A decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure). A corresponding symbol number is attached to each of the effect symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of effect symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as a suitable number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured.

  After the variation display of the effect symbols is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed until the finalized effect symbols that are the variation display results are derived and displayed. , For example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol number flows from top to bottom sequentially from the smallest to the largest, and when the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The effect symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” effect symbol display area 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbols are displayed. When the effect symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the effect symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the effect display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display (also referred to as a hold display) for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. The on-hold storage display in the start winning memory display area 5H is generated based on a start winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning port, or the game ball passes through the second start winning port. The display mode (for example, display color and shape) is varied depending on whether the start is based on (entering) or not. In this embodiment, the reserved memory display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening is a round black display (“●” display), and the second start winning is displayed. The reserved memory display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the mouth is a star-shaped white display (“☆” display).

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display holding memory number obtained by adding the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number is also referred to as a total holding memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state as a vertical position and an expanded open state as a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers, and in particular, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start switch 22B is one. Also good.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed in a variable manner (variable display (also referred to as variable display)). Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 executes a normal symbol variation display such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2. For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 is activated based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the normal symbol variation display, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied after the normal symbol start condition is satisfied. The usual game is started.

  In this ordinary game, after a normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time which is a normal symbol change time elapses, a fixed normal symbol which is a normal symbol change display result is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol becomes “per symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is “usually lost”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the normal symbol is “per normal”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, a special game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variation display is started, when the variation display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol variation display is performed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the fluctuation display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variation display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the number of executions of the round being the second round number less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the variation display of the effect symbols is started. The period from the start of the variation display of the effect symbols to the end of the variation display due to the stop display of the confirmed effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the variation display state of the effect symbol may be a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state refers to an effect design (“reach variation design”) that has not been stopped yet when the effect design that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the design symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, a part of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R, etc.) in advance. The remaining effect symbol display area (for example, “medium” effect) that has not been stopped yet when the effect symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating the alphanumeric character of “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the presentation symbol is changing, or the effect symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes in synchronization while constituting all or part of the combination.

  In response to the reach state, the variation speed of the effect symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the effect symbol is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5. Or change the display mode of the background image, play and display a moving image that is different from the production symbol, or change the variation mode of the production symbol, so that the production operation different from before reaching the reach state is executed May be. Such an effect operation such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the change mode of the effect pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the effect display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of being a “hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “expectation”, “hit reliability” or “hit expectation”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, the reach modes such as normal reach A, normal reach B, normal reach C (small hit, accuracy only), super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C are preset. When the reach form of super reach such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C appears, the fluctuation display result is “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach A and normal reach B appears. (Expectation of big hits) becomes higher. In addition, regarding the reach mode of normal reach, the possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is set so that normal reach A <normal reach B, and also about the reach mode of super reach, The possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is set such that super reach A <super reach B <super reach C.

  During the variation display of the production symbol, unlike the reach production, there is a possibility that the variation display state of the production symbol will be the reach state, the variation display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variation display effect for informing the player is made depending on the variation display mode of the effect symbol. In this embodiment, a variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo-run” can be executed. Note that it is determined whether or not the “sliding” or “pseudo-continuous” variation display effect in the present embodiment is executed in response to the determination of the previous variation pattern described later on the main board 11 side. At the same time, the execution timing is determined on the side of the effect control board 12.

  In the “slip” variable display effect, the effect symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of effect symbol display areas (for example, After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc., a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2” of the effect symbol display areas temporarily displayed). )) In the effect symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” effect symbol display area 5L and the “right” effect symbol display area 5R). The effect display for changing the effect symbol to be stopped is performed. Thus, in the “slip” variation display effect, a predetermined number of effect symbols are temporarily displayed after the variation display of the effect symbols is started until the definite effect symbol that is the variation display result is derived and displayed. When the variation display state of the production symbol is changed to the reach state by executing the variation display for the production symbol again, and when the production symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variation display effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being established once. Before the finalized effect design that is the result is derived and displayed, the effect design is temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display for changing the effect symbols again (pseudo-variable) in all the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is the display of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbols, excluding the initial change from the start of the effect symbol change display until the first temporary stop of all effect symbols. This is the number of times that the effect symbol is re-varied in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is temporarily displayed as a predetermined display result. Thereafter, pseudo continuous variation (revariable display) is performed. In this embodiment, in the pseudo display variation display effect, the pseudo start variation (revariation) is performed once to three times, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variation display of the effect symbol has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” fluctuation display effect may be executed more than 1 to 3 times, for example, 4 times or 5 times. In addition to “sliding” and “pseudo-ream”, for example, “Development Opportunity”, “End of Development Opportunity”, “After Stopping Opportunity” Various presentation operations such as “slip” may be executed.

  During the variation display of the production symbols, unlike the reach production or the variation display production such as “slide” or “pseudo-run”, for example, a predetermined production image is displayed, an image display that is a message, an audio output, a lamp There is a possibility that the variation display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state by the production operation different from the variation display operation of the production symbol such as lighting, or the reach production by the super reach may be executed. In addition, a notice effect may be executed for informing the player in advance that the variation display result may be a “big hit”. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the change display state of the effect symbol after the effect symbol change display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R). Further, the notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that the variation display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect. The pre-reading notice effect is a notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information of the special game before starting the fluctuating display for which the possibility that the fluctuating display result will be a “big hit” or the like is started. is there. In particular, the pre-reading notice effect that continuously predicts the possibility that the change display result will be a “hit” over the change display of the effect symbol that is executed multiple times in response to multiple special figure games, Called. In this embodiment, the first prefetch notice effect and the second prefetch notice effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect. Note that a pre-reading notice effect other than these may be executed.

  In the first look-ahead notice effect, the display part for displaying the special figure reservation storage number in the start winning memory display area 5H is specified in a special mode (for example, a display color or a shape different from the normal display mode). By changing it, it becomes a pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” for notifying the possibility of becoming “big hit” or “super reach” which is a specific fluctuation display pattern in the fluctuation display subject to notice. There are multiple types of special modes. Depending on which special mode is selected, the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” and the possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. Inform.

  Further, the second look-ahead notice effect is a continuous notice in which a series of effects are executed in the effect display device 5 over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display to be notified is executed. There are multiple types of presentation modes for the second look-ahead notice, and depending on which production mode is selected, the variation display result will be “big hit” or “super reach” which is a specific variation display pattern, It is notified that the possibility that the display result will be a “big hit” is higher than usual.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed separately from such a pre-reading notice effect, the variation display result is expressed based on the variation pattern of the variation display and the variation display result. A fluctuating notice effect in which the possibility of becoming a “big hit” is noticed is executed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol does not reach the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. In addition, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variation display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variation display state of the production symbol becomes the reach state after the variation display of the production symbol is started. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed effect symbol that becomes a predetermined reach lose combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variation display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the open game, the change display state of the production symbol is changed. Corresponding to reaching the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed or without a reach effect, a predetermined normal big hit combination (“non-probability variable big hit combination) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations "" Is also displayed). The confirmed effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5. ~ Among the effect symbols of “8”, any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right” What is necessary is just to stop-display all together on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The effect symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”).

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed, the fixed effect symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. The variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the special symbol change display time (special figure change time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. Time-saving control is performed when a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the jackpot gaming state ends, or when one of the conditions is satisfied, ie, the variation display result is “big hit”. Just finish.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that become the normal opening round jackpot symbol, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the change display state of the production symbol is Corresponding to the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “normal jackpot” is executed, a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations The determined effect design may be stopped and displayed. The confirmed effect symbol that is a probable big hit combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5 is “1”. Among the effect symbols of “8”, any one of the effect symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. What is necessary is just to stop-display all together on a predetermined effective line in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. An effect symbol having odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is referred to as a probability variation symbol. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the confirmed effect symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed effect symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variation display mode in which the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game will have a "big hit" variation display result. This is referred to as a variation display mode of “probability variation” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “probability change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, probability fluctuation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the fluctuation display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than the normal state. The probability variation control may be ended when the condition that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state again after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is terminated when it is determined that there is a probability variation control in the probability variation falling lottery executed every time the special figure game is started after the big hit game state is finished, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time-shortening control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. The time until the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-figure game can be executed frequently and the fluctuation display result in each special-figure game will be “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variation display state of the effect symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of finalized effect symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the change display state of the effect symbol being the reach state. After that, a confirmed effect design (a determined effect design that becomes a chance corresponding to the short-term open round big hit state) may be stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variation display mode of the effect symbol in which the various confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variation display result is “big hit” It is referred to as a variation display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the positive change control may be performed together with the short time control.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the change display result is “small hit”, and the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the change display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached the predetermined number when the special figure game whose variation display result is “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  When the winning prize opening is opened after the finalized design symbol that constitutes the opening chance is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the production symbol, the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accurate” There are a case where it is controlled to a short hit big hit state based on that, and a case where it is controlled to a small hit gaming state based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. In addition, when the winning prize opening is opened after the definite effect symbols that make up the reach combination are derived and displayed, the short-term open big hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. There are a time when the game is controlled to the state and a case where the game is controlled to the small hit game state based on the fact that the variation display result is “small hit”. That is, the confirmed effect symbol constituting the opening chance and the confirmed effect symbol constituting the reach combination correspond to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit game state. However, the definitive effect symbols that make up the reach combination are easy to display and are “small hits” when controlled to the short-term open big hit state based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Therefore, when it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state, it is difficult to display. Note that the definite effect symbols constituting these reach combinations may be only when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprising” and the short-term open big hit state is controlled. Therefore, the reach effect symbol of the reach combination is highly likely to be controlled to the short-term open big hit state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol in which the confirmed effect symbol is a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the effect symbols that are usually a big hit combination are temporarily displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5, for example, “left ”,“ Medium ”,“ Right ”effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R with the same effect symbols in the same state, the symbols are changed again, and the effect symbol (probability variation symbol) that is a combination of probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot One of the effect symbols (normal symbols) to be combined is stopped and displayed as a final effect symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed effect symbol that becomes the normal jackpot combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped effect symbol A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, after the re-variation of the temporarily stopped display effect symbol, the definite effect that becomes the probable big hit combination A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  After the definite effect symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one round ends in the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state During the jackpot that will be a probable change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period until the next variable display game starts after the last round in the big hit game state A promotion effect may be executed. A notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the game state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed effect pattern is usually a jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5, and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the effect symbol variation display is performed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and produces the effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. In other words, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as display operations on the effect display device 5, all or part of sound output operations from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or part of lighting / extinguishing operations on the game effect lamp 9 and the like. A function of determining a control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the effect display device 5, a sound control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is an effect that is displayed in a variable manner in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the special symbol change display in the special game. Use the previous variation pattern designation command to specify the front portion of the variation pattern such as symbols (the variation portion that is executed before reaching the reach state, and if it does not reach the reach state, it corresponds to all the variation portions). is there. The command 82XXH is an effect that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the change display of the special symbol in the special game. This is a post-variation pattern designation command for designating a rear portion of a variation pattern such as a symbol (a variation portion after reaching a reach state). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern or the subsequent variation pattern.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or effect symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The different EXT data is set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types in the case of "". More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (determination) of the variation of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the effect display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. The first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B200H indicates that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. Based on this, the second start opening prize designation command is used to notify that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted.

  The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the first special figure reserved memory number when the first start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning. Further, the second reserved memory count notification command is transmitted as a notification of an increase in the second special figure reserved memory count when the second start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning.

  In this embodiment, a first start opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command for designating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is selected as the hold storage information is transmitted. At the same time, a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for designating the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. In addition, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” or “small hit” as the winning determination result, and whether the big hit type is determined. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result (variation category of the post-variation pattern) as to which determination value range the random value MR3 for determining the post-variation pattern falls as a winning determination result.

  In this embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (see FIGS. 19 and 20), based on the occurrence of the start winning, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit”. It is determined whether the jackpot type and the random value MR3 for determining the post-variation pattern fall within a range of determination values. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating that the variation display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small jackpot” or a value for designating the big hit type is set, and the effect control board 12 is set. Control to send. Further, a value (value specifying a category) that specifies a range of a determination value in which the random number value MR3 as a determination result is included in the EXT data of the variable category command is set, and control for transmission to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variation display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and determines the big hit type. In addition to being able to recognize, the variation category of the post-variation pattern can be recognized (specified) based on the value set in the variation category command.

  As an example of the symbol designating command, the command C400H is the first symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, and the command C401H is the variation displaying result “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command C403H is the third symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable variation”, and the command C403H is the variation design result “big hit”. ”Is a fourth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the big hit type is“ surprise ”, and the command C404H is a fifth symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is“ small hit ”. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the variable display result designating command may be shared.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining a post-change pattern, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  The random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, and whether or not the variable display result is the “small hit”. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example. For the jackpot type determination random number MR2, the jackpot type, which is the variation display mode of the effect design when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, is determined as “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the post-variation pattern is a random value used for determining the post-variation pattern, which is the rear portion of the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol, as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, it takes a value in the range of “1” to “997”. The random number value MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern is a random number value used for determining whether the previous variation pattern, which is the front portion of the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol, is one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, it takes a value in the range of “1” to “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the fluctuation display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing the normal figure". For example, a value in the range of “3” to “256”.

  5 and 6 show variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is “big hit” excluding the accuracy, the case where “display accuracy / small hit” is obtained, and the like. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” excluding the probability is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “surprise / small hit” is referred to as a “surprise / small hit variation pattern”.

  For the big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern, a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a reach of normal reach A or normal reach B is executed and a super reach in which a reach of super reach such as super reach A, super reach B or super reach C is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern, and there is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach C is executed as the sudden / small hit fluctuation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the sudden hit / small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” or “outright hit / small hit”.

  Each variation pattern that can be executed in this embodiment is constituted by a combination of a front variation pattern and a rear variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. However, the non-reach fluctuation pattern (excluding non-reach PA 1-5) is composed of only the previous fluctuation pattern. In FIG. 5, a variation pattern name “PR0” indicating that there is no post-variation pattern is stored for convenience as a post-variation pattern of non-reach variation patterns (excluding non-reach PA 1-5). Although the state is shown, there is no variation pattern after these non-reach variation patterns.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 (A), the normal fluctuation display without special effects with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is used as the previous fluctuation pattern in the case of a loss and a big hit. Pre-change pattern (normal) of PF1 to be executed, pre-change pattern (short-form) of PF2 in which normal change display without special effects is performed because the change time is 4.75 seconds, which is shorter than PF1, and changes A time variation of 1.50 seconds, which is even shorter than PF2 and a normal variation display without a special effect is performed, and a variation display with “slip” is performed as a special effect. Pre-change pattern (sliding) of PF4, PF5 pre-change pattern (pseudo-continuous 2 times) with a “pseudo-continuous” display in which two temporary stops are executed as special effects, and special effects As three provisional The previous variation pattern of PF6 which variation display with "pseudo continuous" as stop is executed is executed (pseudo continuous 3 times), it is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, as a pre-change pattern in the case of sudden hit / small hit, a pre-change pattern of PF 7 in which a normal change display is executed with a change time of 12 seconds, Pre-variation pattern of PF8 in which variation display with “slip” is executed, and pre-variation pattern of PF9 in which variation display with “pseudo-continuity” in which one temporary stop is executed as a special effect are set. Has been. It should be noted that only non-reach PC1-1, non-reach PC1-2, and non-reach PC1-3 in which only the pre-change pattern of PF7, PF8, and PF9 is determined and no post-change pattern exists, The normal PC1-4, normal PC1-5, and normal PC1-6, which are displayed and have the PF7 post-change pattern corresponding to the normal reach C together with the PF7, PF8, and PF9 pre-change patterns, are in the reach state as stop symbols. A combination (reach eyes) of outlier effect symbols is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the post-change pattern (normal) of PR1 in which normal change display not including the reach effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. PR2 after-change pattern (normal reach A) in which the first aspect of normal reach A is implemented as a reach effect, and PR3 after-change pattern (normal reach B) in which the effect of the second aspect of normal reach B is implemented as a reach effect ), After PR4 in which the third aspect Super Reach A effect is implemented as a reach effect (Super Reach A), and in the fourth aspect Super Reach B effect is implemented as a reach effect After PR6, where the variation pattern (super reach B) and the fifth aspect of super reach C are produced A moving pattern (super reach C), is set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, as the pre-change pattern in the case of the accuracy / small hit, the post-change pattern of PR7 (normal reach C) in which the effect of the normal reach C of the sixth mode is implemented as the reach effect. Is set.

  A non-reachable variation pattern that does not have a post-variation pattern is set for any of the cases where there is a loss, a big hit, or a sudden / small hit. Is set to “PR0” indicating that there is no post-change pattern.

  That is, among the post-change patterns, the post-change pattern PR0 is a post-change pattern in which there is no change time (that is, no post-change is executed), and the post-change pattern PR1 is a non-change time that is 3.75 seconds. It is a post-variation pattern after reach variation, the post-variation pattern PR2 is a post-variation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach A is executed at a variation time of 5.00 seconds, and the post-variation pattern PR3 is a variation time of 10.50. The post-change pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach B is executed in seconds, and the post-change pattern PR4 is a post-change pattern in which the reach effect of super reach A is executed in 15.50 seconds. PR5 is a post-change pattern in which the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed with a change time of 20.75 seconds. R6 is a post-change pattern in which the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed with a change time of 25.50 seconds, and the post-change pattern PR7 is a reach effect of Normal Reach C with a change time of 8.00 seconds. It is a post-variation pattern.

  Among the previous variation patterns, the previous variation pattern PF1 is a variation pattern with a variation time of 10.00 seconds and no special effects such as slipping or pseudo-continuity are executed, and the variation pattern PF2 has a variation time of 4. The front variation pattern PF3 is a pre-change pattern in which no special effects such as slips or pseudo-reams are executed in 75 seconds, and the pre-change pattern PF3 is a pre-change pattern in which a special effect such as slips or pseudo-reams is not executed in 1.50 seconds. The pre-change pattern PF4 is a pre-change pattern in which the slip is executed as a special effect when the change time is 10.75 seconds, and the pre-change pattern PF5 is a simulation of two times as a special effect when the change time is 12.75 seconds. The pre-variation pattern PF6 is a pre-variation pattern in which three pseudo-continuations are executed as a special effect with a variation time of 14.00 seconds. The dynamic pattern PF7 is a pre-variation pattern in which a special effect such as slip or pseudo-ream is not executed with a change time of 12.00 seconds, and the pre-change pattern PF8 is a special effect with a change time of 12.75 seconds. The pre-variation pattern PF9 is a pre-variation pattern in which a pseudo-ream with a single re-variation is executed as a special effect with a variation time of 17.00 seconds.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, a predetermined variation time is set for each of the above-described pre-variation pattern and post-variation pattern, and the variation time of each variation pattern is the pre-variation constituting each variation pattern. This is the sum of the variation time of the pattern and the variation time of the post-variation pattern.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the non-reach fluctuation pattern excluding the non-reach PA 1-5 is configured by only the front fluctuation pattern, and each of the reach fluctuation patterns is configured by a combination of the front fluctuation pattern and the rear fluctuation pattern. For example, a combination of a front fluctuation pattern (slip) of PF4 as a front fluctuation pattern and a rear fluctuation pattern (super reach A) of PR4 as a rear fluctuation pattern is determined, and a slip effect is executed. After that, the variation pattern of the super PA 3-6 in which the effect of super reach A is executed is determined.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, when super reach is performed after the “slip” effect is executed, only super reach A is determined, and super reach B or super reach C is determined. Is not determined, and when super-reach is performed after the “pseudo-ream” performance is executed, only super reach B or super reach C is determined, and super reach A is not determined. As described above, it is set so that the combination of a part of the front variation pattern and the rear variation pattern is not determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all of the front variation pattern and the rear variation pattern are included. The combination may be determined.

  Regarding the combinations of these pre-variation patterns and post-variation patterns, specifically, a post-loss variation pattern determination table (normal time) and a loss variation pattern determination table (during time reduction control) shown in FIGS. Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 0, 1) Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 2-4) Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 5-8) ) Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 0), Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 1), Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 2-8) ), Variation pattern judgment table after big hit, variation pattern judgment table before big hit, variation pattern judgment table after sudden hit / small hit, sudden hit / small hit It is determined (judged) on the basis of the previous variation pattern determination table.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and the pre-variation patterns and the post-patterns shown in FIGS. 9 to 12. Table data such as various determination tables for determining (determining) the variation pattern is stored.

  FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 7A and a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. Are prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether to control the small hit game state as the “small hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred to for determination. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the fluctuation display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether to control the small hit game state as the “small hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred to for determination.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a special figure display is made depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low accuracy state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the special figure display result determination disorder A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the first special figure display result judgment table 130A and the second special figure display result judgment table 130B, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random value MR1 for special figure display result judgment indicates the special figure display result as “big hit”. ”Is data for determination assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). More judgment values than the time are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). The probability that it is determined that the state is controlled increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 130A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probabilistic state, compared to when it is in a normal state or a short time state. Therefore, the determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of determining to control the jackpot gaming state is high.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “30000” to “30350”) are assigned to the special figure display results of “small hits”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, when the first display condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, the variable display result is determined, A case in which the variation display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. The ratio determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state as “small hit” can be varied.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” and the game state is controlled to the small hit game state. In a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a state (highly accurate high base state), frequent occurrence of a small hit gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to an extended game. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table 130A are assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. Also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value than that in the first special figure display result determination table 130A may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. In this way, when the high base state such as the short-time state or the probability change state is set, the proportion determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the short-time probability change state. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines that the jackpot type is one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the big hit game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the special symbol on which the variation display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination includes a plurality of values such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Assigned to the type of jackpot type.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, the assignment of the determination value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, a predetermined range of judgment values (values in the range of “83” to “100”) are assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the fluctuation special chart Is the second special figure, no determination value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the short-term open big hit state where it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extended game .

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller determination value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  9 to 12 show configuration examples of the variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table after loss shown in FIG. 9A (normal time) and the variation pattern determination table after loss shown in FIG. 9B (during time-shortening control). ), Pre-loss variation pattern determination table (normal, hold 0, 1) shown in FIG. 10A, and pre-loss change pattern determination table (normal, hold 2-4) shown in FIG. 10B. ), The fluctuation pattern determination table before loss shown in FIG. 10C (normal, hold 5 to 8), and the fluctuation pattern determination table before loss shown in FIG. 11A (during time-short control, hold 0). 11B, the change pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 1), and the change pattern determination table before loss, shown in FIG. 11C (during time reduction control, hold 2 to 8). And FIG. 12 is a variation pattern determination table after the big hit shown in FIG. 12B, a variation pattern determination table before the big hit shown in FIG. 12B, a variation pattern determination table after the sudden hit / small hit shown in FIG. ) A pre-accuracy / small hit pre-change pattern determination table is prepared in advance.

  When the change pattern determination table after loss shown in FIG. 9A (normal time) is determined to change the special figure display result to “lost” in the normal state where the time reduction control or the probability change control is not performed, FIG. 9B is a table that is referred to for determining a post-variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random value MR3 for post-variation pattern determination. (During time reduction control), when it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” in the time reduction state in which the time reduction control is being performed, the post-change pattern is based on the random value MR3 for post-change pattern determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine to any one of a plurality of types. In the variation pattern determination table after loss (normal time), the number of special figure reserved memory (total number of reserved memories) is “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, “5” to “8”. In accordance with one of the following, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the post-change pattern is assigned to one of the post-change patterns PR0 to PR6. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table after loss, the number of special figure reserved memory (total number of reserved memories) is “0”, “1”, or “2” to “8”. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the post-change pattern is assigned to one of the post-change patterns PR0 to PR6. In these post-loss variation pattern determination table (normal time) and post-loss variation pattern determination table (during time-short control), each special figure hold memory number (total hold memory number) is determined to be each subsequent change pattern. There are portions where the determination value is assigned to each post-variation pattern so that the ratios differ. As a result, if the change pattern determination table after loss (normal time), the special figure hold memory number (total hold memory number) is “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, “5” to Depending on whether it is “8”, the ratio determined to the same post-change pattern (for example, PR0) can be varied, and if it is a post-lack change pattern determination table (during time reduction control), The same post-change pattern (for example, PR0) is determined depending on whether the special figure reserved memory number (total reserved memory number) is “0”, “1”, or “2” to “8”. The ratio can be varied.

  However, in the variation pattern determination table after the loss (normal time) and the variation pattern determination table after the loss (during time reduction control) of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Regardless of the number of special figure reserved memories (total number of reserved memories) for the post-reach fluctuation patterns “PR4”, “PR5”, and “PR6”, a common determination value range of more than 800 MR3 disturbances By assigning a numerical value, the special figure holding memory number at the time of starting winning (total holding memory number) is the special figure holding memory number (total holding memory number) when the variable display corresponding to the starting winning is performed. ), It is set so that it will not be determined as super reach.

  FIG. 10 (A) pre-loss fluctuation pattern determination table (normal, hold 0, 1), pre-loss change pattern determination table (normal, hold 2-4) shown in FIG. 10 (B), FIG. The change pattern determination table before loss shown in (C) (normal time, hold 5 to 8), the change pattern determination table before loss shown in FIG. 11A (during time reduction control, hold 0), FIG. 11 (B) The change pattern judgment table before loss shown in FIG. 11 (during time reduction control, hold 1) and the fluctuation pattern determination table before loss shown in FIG. 11C (during time reduction control, hold 2 to 8) After the post-change pattern is determined based on the table, the pre-change pattern is determined as one of the post-change patterns corresponding to the determined post-change pattern based on the random number value MR4 for determining the pre-change pattern. A table referenced in order.

  In the pre-loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the pre-change pattern according to any of the post-change patterns determined in the post-loss variation pattern determination table. Are assigned to any one of the previous fluctuation patterns PF1 to PF6. Here, the change pattern determination table before loss (normal time, hold 0, 1), the change pattern determination table before loss (normal time, hold 2-4), the change pattern determination table before loss (normal time, hold 5) ˜8) are selected as usage tables when the gaming state is the normal state. On the other hand, a change pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 0), a change pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 1), a change pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold) 2 to 8) are selected as the use table when the gaming state is a short time state, for example. In these pre-loss variation pattern determination tables, the determination values are set so that the ratios determined for the respective pre-variation patterns are different from each other corresponding to the post-variation patterns determined in the post-loss variation pattern determination table. There is a portion assigned to each forward variation pattern.

  Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 0, 1), Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 2-4), Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 5-8) Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 0), Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 1), Fluctuation change pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 2-8) In some cases, the determination value is assigned to each previous variation pattern so that the ratios determined for each previous variation pattern are different from each other. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same front variation pattern can be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time-varying control in the probability variation state or the time-short state.

  Also, the change pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 0, 1), the change pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 2-4), the change pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 5) 8) Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 0), Fluctuation pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 1), Fluctuation change pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 2) In any of 8), there is a portion in which the ratio determined for each previous variation pattern is assigned to be different for each range of the total number of reserved memories, which is the total number of reserved memories.

  Specifically, with respect to each pre-loss variation pattern determination table (normally) shown in FIG. 10, the pre-variation patterns “PF1”, “PF2”, “PF3”, “PF4” corresponding to the post-variation pattern “PR0”. Is set to be different for each range of the total number of reserved memories. That is, when the total number of reserved memories is 1 or less, there is no assignment of determination values for the previous variation pattern (shortened) of “PF2” and the previous variation pattern (super shortened) of “PF3”, and before “PF1” Since there are many determination values assigned to the variation pattern (normal), the previous variation pattern (normal) of “PF1” is easily determined. Further, when the total number of reserved storages is in the range of 2 to 4, the pre-variation pattern (shortening) of “PF2” is determined by the large number of determination values assigned to the pre-variation pattern (shortening) of “PF2”. Easy to be. In addition, when the total number of reserved memories is in the range of 5 or more, the number of determination values assigned to the previous variation pattern (super shortened) of “PF3” is large, so that the previous variation pattern (super shortened) of “PF3” is increased. As the number of reserved memories increases, it becomes easier to determine a previous fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, so that the number of reserved memories digested per unit time increases.

  Similarly, with respect to each pre-loss variation pattern determination table (during time reduction control) illustrated in FIG. 11, the pre-variation patterns “PF1”, “PF2”, “PF3”, and “PF4” corresponding to the post-variation pattern “PR0”. The determination value is assigned differently for each range of the total number of reserved storage. Specifically, the assignment of the determination value to the previous variation pattern (normal) of “PF1” is set so as to gradually decrease as the number of reserved memories increases, and the previous variation pattern of “PF3” (very short) The assignment of the judgment value to is set so as to gradually increase as the number of reserved memories increases. Therefore, as in the case of the change pattern determination table before loss (usually normal), as the number of reserved memories increases, a pre-change pattern with a short fluctuation time becomes easier to be determined, and the reserved memory that is digested in unit time. The number has come to increase.

  It should be noted that the number of determination values corresponding to “PF2” and “PF3” in each variation pattern determination table before loss shown in FIG. 11 (during short-time control) is the variation pattern determination table before loss in the case of the same reserved storage number. (Normally) is set to be larger than the number of determination values corresponding to “PF2” and “PF3”, so that when the gaming state is short-running, than when it is in the normal state, Since it becomes easier to determine the pre-variation pattern (shortening) of “PF2” and the pre-variation pattern (super shortening) of “PF3”, the number of pending storage digested in a unit time is large, that is, executed in unit time By increasing the number of special figure games, the period until the big hit is generated is shortened.

  The big hit hour post fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12A is based on a random value MR3 for post fluctuation pattern determination when it is determined that “non-probable big hit” or “probable big hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine (determine) any one of a plurality of types. In the post-hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the post-change pattern according to whether the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” except for “probability”. Are assigned to any of the post-variation patterns PR2 to PR6 accompanied by the reach effect. The big hit hour post fluctuation pattern determination table includes a portion in which a determination value is assigned to each post change pattern so that the ratios determined for each post change pattern are different from each other in each big hit type. As a result, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the ratios determined for the same post-change pattern, for example, PR4 to PR6, which are super-reach post-change patterns, are different. Can be made.

  The variation pattern determination table before the big hit shown in FIG. 12B is based on the random value MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern after the after variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern determination table after the big hit. This is a table that is referred to for determination as one of a plurality of types. In the variation pattern determination table before the big hit, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern according to any of the subsequent variation patterns determined in the variation pattern determination table after the big hit. Are assigned to any one of the previous fluctuation patterns PF1, PF4 to PF6. In this variation pattern determination table before the big hit, the determination values are set so that the ratios determined for the respective previous variation patterns are different from each other corresponding to the respective variation patterns determined in the variation pattern determination table after the big hit. There is a portion assigned to each forward variation pattern. Thereby, according to each post-change pattern determined in the big hit time post-change pattern determination table, the ratio determined to the same pre-change pattern can be varied.

  In this embodiment, only predetermined pre-change patterns are assigned to the post-change patterns PR2 to PR6 so as to be the change patterns shown in FIG. 6A. The present invention is not limited, and all the previous variation patterns may be assigned to these subsequent variation patterns PR2 to PR6.

  In the variation pattern determination table for after-accuracy / small hits shown in FIG. 12C, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” (the fluctuation display result is “ When the result is determined to be “small hit” (when the fluctuation display result is “small hit”), the post-change pattern is changed to the disturbance for determining the post-change pattern. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the variation pattern determination table after sudden / small hit, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the subsequent variation pattern according to whether the variation display result is “surprise” or “small hit”. , It is assigned to either the post-change pattern PR0 or PR7. This variation pattern determination table for the accuracy / small hits includes a portion in which determination values are assigned to each subsequent variation pattern so that the ratios determined for each subsequent variation pattern are different from each other in each variation display result. . As a result, depending on whether the fluctuation display result is “Accuracy” or “Small hit”, it is possible to vary the ratios determined for the same post-variation pattern (for example, PR7). It should be noted that a post-variation pattern PR7 of normal reach C may be determined only in the case of a sudden probability by assigning a determination value only to the suddenness to PR7.

  12D is a random pattern MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern after the variation pattern determination table after the big hit time is determined in the variation pattern determination table. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the variation pattern determination table before sudden / small hit, the random value MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern is compared with each of the subsequent variation patterns determined in the variation pattern determination table after the sudden / small hit. A numerical value (determination value) is assigned to one of the previous variation patterns PF7PF9. In this variation pattern determination table before the accuracy / small hit, the ratios determined for the respective variation patterns are different from each other corresponding to each variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination table after the accuracy / small hit. As described above, there is a portion where a determination value is assigned to each previous variation pattern. Thereby, according to each post-change pattern determined in the big hit time post-change pattern determination table, the ratio determined to the same pre-change pattern can be varied.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 13 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 13 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A has not started yet although the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the start winning (first start winning) has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the subsequent variation pattern, and the random number value MR3 for determining the subsequent variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. Numerical data indicating the random value MR4 is stored as pending data until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  The second special figure storage unit 151B has been started although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a start winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the subsequent variation pattern, and the random number value MR3 for determining the subsequent variation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure storage unit 151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of (result), the hold information makes it possible to determine whether or not a predetermined game value is given or whether or not super reach is reached.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The general-purpose holding storage unit 151C stores the holding information of the general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure holding storage unit 151C associates the holding numbers with the holding numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passing gate 41, and determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the software 103 can be updated by software.

  For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as random count values. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating a random value independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the effect display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decoration LED, the effect model, etc.). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, various effect control patterns such as a special figure change effect control pattern and a notice effect control pattern may be stored.

  The special-control variation production control pattern corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special-sign game until the finalized special symbol that is the special-sign display result is derived and displayed. It consists of data indicating the contents of control of various effect operations, such as effect display operations in effect symbol variation display operation, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations not accompanied by effect symbol variation display Has been. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect executed in response to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 14A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as a special control change effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of control data for controlling various performance operations, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various performance controls, the timing of switching the performance control, and the like in time series. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control board 12. Thus, a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation on the effect control board 12. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 5, such as data indicating the change mode of each effect symbol during the display of the effect symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the effect display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of a sound effect or the like that is linked to the change display operation of the stage design during the stage display of the stage design. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 14B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the effect design process is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the effect display device 5. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 14B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the change display of the effect symbol An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during the display of the effect symbol variation (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  The effect control CPU 120 is based on a variation pattern based on a combination of the previous variation pattern and the subsequent variation pattern specified from the previous variation pattern designation command and the subsequent variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variation display of the representation symbol. To set an effect control pattern (effect control pattern when a special figure changes). The effect control CPU 120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern), for example, when execution of a predetermined effect such as a notice effect is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect device (effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game, in accordance with the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the effect lamp 9 and a light emitting body such as a decoration LED, a movable member provided in the production model, etc. is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that receives a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP (video display processor) or the like reads image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in the VRAM. Etc. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 15A as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 15A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 15B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening or the second start prize opening, a start opening prize designation command (first start slot prize designation command or second start slot prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command , And a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are set as one set and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Therefore, if the command reception is normally performed, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory count notification command are sequentially stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. It will be stored. In FIG. 15B, the command is stored in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “5”.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 15B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) every time the effect symbol variation display is started. Is deleted from the stored contents, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 15 (B), when the variable display of a new effect symbol is started, each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted, and the command corresponding to the buffer number “2” is deleted. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “5” is changed to the buffer number. The region is shifted to a region corresponding to “2” to “4”. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 15B, for the area corresponding to the buffer number “2”, an example in which the command reception cannot be performed normally and the pending storage number notification command is missed is shown. Has been. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 15B, the content in the fourth storage area where the reserved storage number notification command is originally stored is “0000 (H)” corresponding to the buffer number “2”. It remains.

  Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the start winning command (start opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command and pending memory number notification command) stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A Or, a pre-reading notice pattern for execution is determined. At this time, if there are any missing or inconsistent commands in the start winning prize, the pre-reading notice effect setting will not be performed until the change information of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Limited to When a command for starting a prize is received during a period in which the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted (during pre-reading notice restriction), the pre-reading notice effect setting is not performed at that reception timing. The determination information is set to “1” (or on state). In the case of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect of all aspects may not be executed for the pre-reading notice effect that targets the variable display corresponding to the start winning that occurred within a predetermined period. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice effect of some aspects may not be executed.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 16 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are possible. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 16 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 in FIG. 17 as the start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first performs the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S206).

  After performing one of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the number of special figure hold storage numbers corresponding to the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S208). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining, the random value MR3 for determining the subsequent variation pattern, and the random value MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern are extracted (step S209). The numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type indicate whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the production symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, Is used to determine the jackpot type when the variation display result is “big hit”. The random value MR3 for determining the post-change pattern is used for determining the post-change pattern including the change display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol. The random value MR4 is used to determine the previous variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol. The CPU 103 executes numerical value data indicating a part or all of the random number values used for the determination of the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the effect symbol by executing the process of step S209. Extract.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, transmission setting of a start port winning designation command corresponding to the start port buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 16 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S211, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S213). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 16 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the process of step S213, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then step S204. Proceed to the process. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S216). The start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S212 of FIG. 18 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol is started, the special symbol display result (the variation display result of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 17, FIG. 21) described later. Whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is determined as “big hit” or “small hit”. Further, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 17, FIG. 22), which will be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variation display mode of the effect symbol is performed. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process in step S212 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variation display mode of the production symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. Performs category judgment or not. As a result, the special symbol display result may be “big hit” or “small hit” before the variation display of the special symbol and the production symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started. Predicting that the variable display mode of the symbol becomes the predetermined display mode, and determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side based on the prediction result. Can do.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time reduction flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, and the like, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 The current gaming state at is identified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S401, the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current value are obtained from the table data constituting the first special figure display result judgment table 130A or the second special figure display result judgment table 130B. Corresponding to the gaming state, the special figure display result determination table data used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S402). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 extracted in step S209 in FIG. 18 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the processing of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and each of the determination values. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the determination value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variation display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S403). S404). The CPU 103 executes processing similar to that in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table data selected by the processing in step S402. Thus, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step S405), the process proceeds to step S418. As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “04H”.

  In step S418, the fluctuation category is specified as “small hit”, and the process proceeds to step S420.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S410). At this time, the CPU 103 responds according to the fluctuation special figure corresponding to the start port buffer value ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2"). The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined whether the jackpot type is determined as a plurality of types. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result by the processing of step S410 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S411). As an example, when it is determined in step S410 that the jackpot type is determined to be “probable change”, the EXT data in the symbol designation command is set to “01H”, and the jackpot type is determined to be determined to be “non-probable change”. The command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “03H” is set when the EXT data in the symbol designating command is set to “02H” and the jackpot type is determined to be “surprise”. That's fine.

  Subsequent to the process of step S411, in step S412, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type determined in the process of step S410 is “probable”. Whether or not the jackpot type determined in the process of step S410 is “surprise”, for example, whether or not the command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “03H” is set in the process of step S411. What is necessary is just to judge. When the big hit type is “probable” (step S412; Yes), the process proceeds to step S417.

  If the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S412; No), the process proceeds to step S413, whether or not the random value MR3 extracted in the processing of step S209 is 50 or more, that is, the probable big hit or the non-probable big hit. Regardless of the above, it is determined whether or not the determination value assigned to the post-reach fluctuation pattern is applicable. When the random value MR3 is 50 or more, the process proceeds to step S416. On the other hand, if the random value MR3 is not 50 or more, the process proceeds to step S414, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot type determined in the process of step S410 is a probabilistic jackpot.

  If it is not a probable big hit, the process proceeds to step S417. In the case of the probable big hit, the random value MR3 extracted in the process of step S209 is further assigned to the post-super-reaching variation pattern only in the case of the probable big hit, whether or not the random value MR3 is 25 or more. It is determined whether it corresponds to the determination value.

  If the extracted random number MR3 is 25 or more, the process proceeds to step S416. On the other hand, if the extracted random number MR3 is not 25 or more, the process proceeds to step S417.

  In step S416, the variation category of the post-variation pattern is specified as “super reach”, and the flow proceeds to step S420. In step S417, the variation category of the post-variation pattern is specified as “others”, and the process proceeds to step S420.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S404, when it is not determined that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a design designation command corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost” is sent to the effect control board 12. Is set for transmission (step S421; FIG. 20). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “00H”.

  Then, whether or not the random number MR3 extracted in the process of step S209 is 800 or more, that is, in the variation pattern determination table after loss (normal time) and the variation pattern determination table after loss (during time reduction control), the total It is determined whether or not the determination value range is commonly assigned to the post-reach fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of reserved memories (step S422). When the random number MR3 is 800 or more (step S422; Yes), the variation category is specified as “super reach” (step S423), and the process proceeds to step S420.

  If the random value MR3 is less than 800 (step S422; No), whether or not the random value MR3 extracted in the process of step S209 is 399 or less, that is, a change pattern determination table after loss (normal time) and In the post-loss variation pattern determination table (during time reduction control), it is determined whether or not the determination value range is commonly assigned to the non-reach post-variation pattern regardless of the total number of reserved memories. (Step S424). When the random value MR3 is equal to or less than 399 (step S424; Yes), the variation category is specified as “non-reach” (step S425), and the process proceeds to step S420. If the random value MR3 is not 399 or less (step S424; No), the variation category is specified as “others” and the process proceeds to step S420.

  Then, in the process of step S420, the CPU 103 sends, to the effect control board 12, a variation category command corresponding to the variation category identified by any of the processes of step S416, step S417, step S418, step S423, step S425, or step S426. Then, after setting for transmission, the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 18 and the winning random number determination process shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, after the process of step S211 in FIG. 18, the winning time fluctuation shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. By executing the numerical value determination processing, processing for transmitting various commands in steps S405, S411, S421, and S420 in FIG. 19 is executed, and further, processing in step S214 in FIG. 18 is executed. After these processes are executed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 16 is executed, so that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first start condition Or when the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory count notification command (first hold) Four commands called a storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are transmitted as a set in one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 17, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or effect symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. A determination (predetermined) is made before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the special symbol variation display result in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol or the like in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B). Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process is performed using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining a subsequent variation pattern based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Based on the process of determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types and the determination result of the subsequent variation pattern, the previous variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the previous variation pattern. Processing to be included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special diagram process flag is updated to “2”.

  A variation pattern (a variation pattern including a variation pattern display time and a variation pattern including a variation pattern display time of a special symbol, a special symbol, and a production symbol, which is a variation display result of the special symbol, by the special symbol normal process in step S110 and the variation pattern setting process in step S111. ) Is determined. In other words, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are performed in the random number value MR1 for determining the special graphic display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the subsequent variation pattern, and the random value for determining the previous variation pattern. It includes a process of determining the variation display mode of the special symbol and the effect symbol using the numerical value MR4.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is a stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or added by 1, Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed in the special symbol variation in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the definite special symbol resulting from the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is turned on. When the jackpot flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. Is done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the like, for example, a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state. include. In this case, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. For example, in response to the big hit type of “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds” and the upper prize is set to the upper limit number of times to execute the round. By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, it is only necessary to set the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, corresponding to the big hit type “surprise”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 second”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “15 times” to set the short-term open big hit state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the game effect lamp 9, or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses, processing that performs various settings for starting probability variation control and time-saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the like are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening to be in an open state in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the change display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the fluctuation display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It includes processing to wait until it has passed. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 17 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game executed with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure. For example, the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening may be used. The execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is sufficient if it can be determined.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A stores the storage corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As the data, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) is shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151A. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing either of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special table display result, which is the special symbol variable display result, is used as a use table for determining whether to be “big hit” or “lost”. A special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 103 may select the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state, similarly to the process of step S402 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” (step S240).

  Since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current gaming state is selected in step S239, in the process of step S240, the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a probable change state. Depending on whether or not, the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” using different determination data. For example, when the game state when the variable display of a special figure game or the like is started is a normal state or a short time state, the game state is indicated in the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the normal state or the short time state is selected as the normal determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this data. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probability change state, the game state is indicated in the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B. The table data corresponding to the probability variation state is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random value MR1 is determined with reference to this data.

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the big hit type determination random number MR2 stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is set to “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is determined which jackpot type is a plurality of types (step S244).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S244, the game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is any one of the short-time state and the probable state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-time state. It is determined before the determined special symbol is derived as the variable display result. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set corresponding to the result of the prior determination of whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S248). As an example, when it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, “3”, “5”, “7”, which are big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal big hit symbol among the normal open round big hit symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol among the normal open round big hit symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “probable”, the special symbol indicating the number “5” that is the short-term open big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S111 of FIG. 17 as the variation pattern setting processing. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), for example, by reading the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, It is determined which of the “probability” (step S263), and the process proceeds to step S264.

  In step S264, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type identified in step S263 is “probable” (step S264). When the big hit type is “probable” (step S264; Yes), the process proceeds to step S270, and when the big hit type is not “probable” (step S264; No), the post-change pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types. As the usage table, the big hit after fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12A is selected (step S265). In the big hit after fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit type ("non-probable change" or The post-variation pattern is determined based on the determination value corresponding to “probability change”) and the random value MR3 (step S266). And after setting for transmitting the post-change pattern designation command according to the determined post-change pattern to the effect control board 12 (step S267), the pre-hit-time pre-change pattern shown in FIG. A determination table is selected (step S267a), and the process proceeds to step S273.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S269). If the small hit flag is on (step S269; Yes), the variation pattern determination at the time of sudden hit / small hit shown in FIG. 12C is used as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of types of post-change patterns. A table is selected (step S270), and the post-change occurs based on the determination value corresponding to the change display result (“No” in step S264 and “Small” if Yes in step S269) and the random value MR3. The pattern is determined (step S271). Then, after setting for transmitting a post-change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined post-change pattern to the effect control board 12 (step S271a), the collision accuracy / small hit shown in FIG. The pre-hour variation pattern determination table is selected, and the process proceeds to step S273.

  If the small hit flag is not on in step S269 (step S269; No), the total reserved memory number is specified by referring to the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B ( Step S281), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is running short (Step S281a). Whether the time is short or not may be determined by confirming whether or not the time flag indicating that the time is short is set. If the time is short (step S281a; Yes), the change pattern determination table after loss is selected (during time reduction control) and the process proceeds to step S283. If the time is not short (step S281a; No), the change after loss The pattern determination table (normal time) is selected, and the process proceeds to step S283.

  In the process of step S283, the CPU 103 determines the post-change pattern corresponding to the total number of reserved memories based on the random number value MR3 in the post-loss time change pattern determination table (normal time) or the post-loss time change pattern determination table (during short time control). Is determined (step S283). Then, after setting for transmitting a post-change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined post-change pattern to the effect control board 12 (step S283a), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is short. (Step S284). Whether the time is short or not may be determined by confirming whether or not the time flag indicating that the time is short is set.

  If the time is not short (step S284; No), it is further determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories specified in the process of step S281 is 1 or less (step S285). When the total number of reserved memories is 1 or less (step S285; Yes), the pre-loss variation pattern determination table (normal, hold 0, 1) shown in FIG. 10A is selected (step S286). In S273, if the total number of reserved memories is not 1 or less, that is, 2 or more (step S285; No), it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories specified in the process of step S281 is 4 or less. (Step S287). When the total number of reserved memories is 4 or less (step S287; Yes), that is, when the total number of reserved memories is “2” to “4”, the change pattern determination table before loss (normal, hold 2 to 2) 4) is selected (step S288), the process proceeds to step S273, and when the total number of reserved memories is not 4 or less, that is, 5 or more (step S287; No), the change pattern determination table before loss (normal time, (Reservation 5-8) is selected (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S273.

  If it is determined in step S284 that the time is short (step S284; Yes), it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories specified in the process of step S281 is 0 (step S291). If the total number of reserved memories is 0 (step S291; Yes), the change pattern determination table before loss shown in FIG. 11A (during time-short control, hold 0) is selected (step S292) and the process proceeds to step S273. If the total number of reserved memories is not 0, that is, 1 or more (step S291; No), it is determined whether or not the total number of reserved memories specified in the process of step S281 is 1 (step S293). ). If the total number of reserved memories is 1 (step S293; Yes), select the change pattern determination table before loss (during time reduction control, hold 1) (step S294) and proceed to step S273, where the total number of reserved memories is If it is not 1, that is, it is 2 or more (step S293; No), the pre-loss variation pattern determination table (during time reduction control, hold 2-8) is selected (step S295), and the process proceeds to step S273.

  In the processing of step S273, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern determination table before the big hit selected at step S267a, the fluctuation pattern determination table before the hit / small hit selected at step S272, and the fluctuation before the loss selected at step S286. Pattern determination table (normal, hold 0, 1) Pre-loss variation pattern determination table selected in step S288 (normal, hold 2-4), pre-loss change pattern determination table selected in step S289 (normal , Hold 4-8), change pattern determination table before loss selected in step S292 (during time reduction control, hold 0), change pattern determination table before loss selected in step S294 (during time reduction control, hold 1) ), Loss-before-change pattern determination table selected in step S295 Determining (in time reduction control, hold 2-8) according to any of the previous variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern after based on the random number value MR4 (step S273). And the setting for transmitting the front variation pattern designation | designated command according to the determined front variation pattern with respect to the production control board 12 is performed (step S273a).

  After the transmission setting of the previous variation pattern designation command is performed in step S273a, the variation time of the subsequent variation pattern determined in step S266, step S271, or step S283 and the variation time of the previous variation pattern determined in step S273. Is set as a special figure fluctuation time which is a special symbol fluctuation display time (step S274). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. It is.

  After executing the process of step S272, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. A setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special game using the figure (step S275). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S275, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S276). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance. Are stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S277), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Based on the command transmission setting in step S276, every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 16 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is changed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a subsequent variation pattern designation command, a previous variation pattern designation command, a variation display result designation command, a first reserved storage number notification command or a second reserved storage number notification command, It will be transmitted sequentially. Note that the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variation display result designation command is transmitted first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, and the subsequent variation pattern designation. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the command, the previous variation pattern designation command, the gaming state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). , It is specified whether the big hit type is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "surprise change". At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified jackpot type is “uncertain change” (step S323). When it is determined that the big hit type is not “non-probable change” (step S323; No), setting for starting the probability change control is performed (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to the on state.

  When it is determined in step S323 that the big hit type is “non-probable change” (step S323; Yes), after executing the process of step S324, the setting for starting the time reduction control is performed (step S325). . For example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined initial count value (for example, “100”, etc.) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the time reduction control to the number of time reductions. Set to counter. If the big hit type is “Sudden”, depending on whether or not the short-time control was performed before the short-term open big hit state, whether or not the setting to start the short-time control is made different. Also good. In addition, when the big hit type is “probability change”, the initial setting of the time reduction count value is not performed, and both the probability change control and the time reduction control continue until the next special chart display result becomes “big hit”. It may be set to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is initialized to “0” (step S326), and then the big hit end processing is ended.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the effect display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S74 of FIG. 25 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is not the second pending storage notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a previous variation pattern designation command (step S512). If it is a previous variation pattern designation command (step S512; Yes), the previous variation pattern designation command is updated and stored in the previous variation pattern storage area (step S513), and the previous variation pattern designation command reception flag is set (step S514). Return to step S501.

  If the received command is not a previous variation pattern command in step S512 (step S512; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a subsequent variation pattern designation command (step S515). If the command is a post-variation pattern designation command (step S515; Yes), the post-variation pattern designation command is updated and stored in the post-variation pattern storage area (step S516), and the post-variation pattern designation command reception flag is set (step S517). Return to step S501.

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing any one of the processes of S514 and S517, the received command is stored at the head of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 194A (step S519), and the process returns to step S501.

  In addition, when the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the pending storage is performed. The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning receiving command buffer 194A.

  If the received command is not a post-variation pattern designation command in step S515 (step S515; No), after making settings according to other received commands (step S518), the process returns to step S501.

  An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning occurs, such as a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command, is also referred to as a command at the time of starting winning. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, which are production control commands for specifying that the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number have increased, can be recognized. Also called stored information. The on-hold storage information includes a start opening prize designation command. Based on numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 and the like when the start winning occurs, the determination result of whether or not the variation display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination result of the big hit type The symbol designation command and the variation category command, which are production control commands for designating the variation category determination result, are also referred to as determination result information. Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, the received command is any one of a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area. When receiving each received command separately, the storage area of the received received command is blank, and only some effect control commands to be received as one set are excessively stored.

  As a specific example, when one of a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command is received, whether the first reserved memory count notification waiting time or the second reserved memory count notification waiting time has elapsed. Determine whether. At this time, if these waiting times have not elapsed, it is determined that the command corresponding to the start port winning designation command can be received within the normal reception period, and the start port already stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 194A is stored. The received command is stored in association with the winning designation command. On the other hand, if any one of the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number notification command is received, if the first reserved memory number notification waiting time and the second reserved memory number notification waiting time have elapsed, If the winning designation command is missing or cannot be received within the normal receiving period, the received command may be stored in association with the new buffer number in the starting winning reception command buffer 194A.

  FIG. 27 shows a random number SR2 used in the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) in this embodiment. The random value SR2 is a random value used for determining whether or not to execute the roll effect according to whether or not the mode transition is determined as the prefetch notice in step S809 of the prefetch notice process in the roll effect determination process. For example, it takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  In order to enhance the gaming effect, random values other than the random number SR2 may be extracted from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, or the like.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 25 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prefetch notice process that determines the presence or absence of a prefetch notice effect and an effect mode (step S161).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S161 in FIG. 28 as the prefetch determination process. In the pre-reading determination process shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in, for example, the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S801). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new received command that is at least one of the effect control commands (such as the start opening winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command) received at the time of starting winning (step S802). For example, the presence / absence of a new received command is confirmed by checking whether at least one of the start opening winning designation command or the pending storage number notification command is newly stored in the received command buffer 194A at the start winning Can be determined.

  If no command is newly received in step S802 (step S802; No), the prefetch determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a received command (step S802; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pre-reading notice is already being executed (step S803). For example, in the process of step S803, it is assumed that the prefetching notice is being executed when the prefetching notice flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is on. What is necessary is just to judge. The prefetch notice flag is set to an on state when a notice effect that is a predetermined prefetch notice is executed.

  If it is determined in step S803 that the pre-reading notice is being executed (step S803; Yes), a predetermined second start winning interruption determination process is executed (step S804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading notice is not being executed (step S803; No), the order and contents of the received commands (start opening prize designation command and pending storage number notification command) based on the occurrence of the start prize are checked. (Step S805), it is determined whether or not the reception was successful (step S806). In the process of step S806, for example, whether or not the received commands at the start winning prize are in order, whether or not all the received commands have been received without omission, whether the contents of the symbol designation command and the variable category command are consistent, Whether or not the contents of the oral winning designation command and the stored memory number notification command are consistent is confirmed, and if any one of them is denied, it may be determined that the reception was not successful. In addition, when any one is denied, it is not limited to what determines that abnormality has occurred, and for example, when any two are denied, it may be determined that abnormality has occurred. Alternatively, when all are denied, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S806 that the signal has been received normally, a process (not shown) for setting undetermined information corresponding to the latest command in the start winning reception command buffer 194A is performed, and then step S817 is performed. Proceed to, and hold display normal update processing is executed. In the hold display normal update process in step S817 when the undetermined information is set, the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number are displayed as the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H. Each part is changed to a predetermined abnormal display mode, and the display part corresponding to the newly held state is also changed. Even if the start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command) cannot be received normally, the reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second Since the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number can be specified if the hold memory number notification command) can be normally received, the hold display can be updated in the normal display mode. Good. The abnormal display mode differs from the normal display mode or the notice display mode in that some or all of the display color, display shape, display character, etc. of the display area are different, causing a missed command at the start winning prize. What is necessary is just to be able to alert | report that. In addition, while only the display part corresponding to newly reserved is set as the abnormal display form, the display forms in other display parts may not be changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the undetermined information is set, the execution of the pre-reading notice process is not limited, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the undetermined information is not limited. Is set (“1” in FIG. 15B), execution or determination of the pre-reading notice may be restricted.

  If it is determined in step S806 that the reception has been successful (step S806; Yes), the start opening winning designation command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A is checked (step S807). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result information can execute the pre-reading notice effect (step S808). For example, in the process of step S807, the variation category received before the latest start opening winning designation command and stored in the start winning command buffer is read. In the process of step S808, if the result of reading in step S807 includes a change display result of “big hit” or “small hit” before the change display to be notified, a pre-reading notice effect is displayed. What is necessary is just to determine that it is not executable. Alternatively, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect cannot be performed when the change display state of the effect symbol is in a specific display mode before the change display to be notified. In other words, when all the variation categories received in the command buffer at the time of the start winning prize before the latest start opening winning designation command are “non-reach” and “other lost”, the pre-reading notice effect May be determined to be executable.

  Further, in the process of step S808, when the special figure reservation storage number (the first special figure reservation storage number or the second special figure reservation storage number) is less than a predetermined number (for example, less than “2”, for example), the pre-reading notice effect May be determined to be infeasible. When the special figure hold storage number is “1”, there is no change display stored in addition to the change display to be notified. Therefore, when the pre-reading notice effect is started with the execution of a new variable display after the start winning is generated, it is determined that such a pre-reading notice effect cannot be executed before the start of the variable display to be notified. do it. It should be noted that for the pre-reading notice effect that can be started immediately after the start winning is generated, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect based on the number of special figure reservations can be executed.

  If it is determined in step S808 that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed (step S808; Yes), the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice indicating whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the type of the pre-reading notice in the case of execution are determined. (Advance notice type) is determined (step S809). As an example, in the process of step S809, a prefetch notice type determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining the presence and type of prefetch notice. In the prefetching notice type determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value for determining the prefetching notice type according to the variation category transmitted based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to the variation display to be notified However, the decision result of “No advance notice” corresponding to the case where the pre-reading notice is not executed, and a plurality of pre-reading notice types such as “special symbol”, “hold display”, “mode shift” when the pre-reading notice is executed, It only has to be assigned. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetching notice type determination table based on numerical data indicating the random number value for prefetching notice type determination extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit. Thus, the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice type may be determined.

  FIG. 30 shows an example of the pre-reading notice type determination ratio (first start-opening winning designation command) in the example of the pre-reading notice type determination ratio indicating the presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the pre-reading notice type determination ratio by the processing of step S809. Whether the variation category by the command or the second start opening winning designation command is “non-reach” or “other lose”, whether it is the “super reach” variation category, and other variation display results are uncertain The presence / absence of the pre-reading notice effect and the rate of determining the pre-reading notice type are varied depending on whether the category is a variation category corresponding to the case of “big hit”, “surprise” or “small hit”. For example, when the fluctuation category is “Super Reach” or “Other than the above (big hit / accuracy / small hit)”, the pre-reading notice is produced at a higher rate than when the fluctuation category is “Non-reach” or “Other loss”. It is decided to execute. With this setting, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, there is a high possibility that the change display mode of the effect symbol becomes a specific display mode.

  In addition, when the fluctuation category is “other than the above (big hit / accuracy / small hit)”, the pre-reading notice is produced at a higher rate than when the fluctuation category is “super reach”, “non-reach”, or “other loss”. It is decided to execute. In particular, the rate at which the pre-reading notice type is determined to be “mode shift” is sufficiently high when the variation category is “other than the above (big hit / accuracy / small hit)”. In addition, the ratio of the pre-reading notice type determined as “hold display” + “mode shift” (simultaneous determination of “hold display” and “mode shift”) depends on whether the fluctuation category is “super reach”, “non-reach”, “ It ’s much higher than when it ’s “other loses”. As a result, when the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” or “hold display” + “mode transition” is executed, the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, “accurate”, “small” at a higher rate than when it is not executed. Hits.

  More specifically, the degree of expectation P3 that is a big hit / accuracy / small win when the “mode change” prefetching notice effect is executed is the big hit / accuracy when the “special symbol” prefetching notice effect is executed.・ The expectation P3 that is set higher than the expectation level P1 that is a small hit and that is a big hit, abruptness, or a small hit when the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is executed is the prefetch of the “hold display” It is set higher than the expectation P2 that is a big hit / accuracy / small hit when the notice effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the expectation P1 that is a big hit / accuracy / small hit when the pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” is executed is the ratio of the big hit / surprise / small hit and the big hit / accuracy・ The product of the ratio to be determined for the pre-reading notice of “special design” at the time of a small hit, the product of the ratio to be a super-reach lose and the ratio to be determined for the pre-reading notice of “special design” at the time of super-reach lose, non-reach loss Product of the ratio to be determined in the pre-reading notice effect of “special design” at the time of non-reach loss / other loss, the ratio to be a big hit / accuracy / small hit and the special symbol pre-reading notice effect in the case of big hit / accuracy / small hit It is the value divided by the sum of the products of the ratios to be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the expectation P2 that is a big hit / accuracy / small hit when the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is executed is a ratio of the big hit / accuracy / small hit and the big hit / accuracy / small hit The product of the ratio to be determined as the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” at the time of hit, the product of the ratio to be a super reach loss and the ratio to be determined as the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” at the time of super reach loss, the ratio to be a non-reach loss / other loss The product of the ratio to be determined for the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” at the time of non-reach loss / other loss, the ratio to be the big hit / accuracy / small hit and the “hold display” pre-read announcement effect at the big hit / accuracy / small hit It is the value divided by the sum of products of percentages.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the expectation degree P3 that is a big hit / accuracy / small win when the “mode shift” pre-reading notice effect is executed is a ratio of the big hit / accuracy / small hit and the big hit / accuracy / small hit The product of the ratio to be determined for the pre-reading notice of “Mode Transition” at the time of hit, the ratio of the ratio to be a Super-Leach Loss and the ratio to be determined to be the Pre-Ahead Notification for “Mode Transition” at the time of Super-Leach Loss, the ratio to be a non-reach loss / other loss The product of the ratio to be determined for the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” at the time of non-reach loser and other loses, the ratio to be a big hit / surprise / small hit and the “mode change” pre-read notice advance effect at the big hit / surprise / small hit It is the value divided by the sum of products of percentages.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” + “mode shift” is executed, the expectation level that is a big hit / accuracy / small hit is the big hit when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” described above is executed. The combined value of the expectation P2 that is the accuracy / small hit and the expectation P3 that is the big hit / accuracy / small win when the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect is executed.

  In the process of step S809 of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” and the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” are simultaneously determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a table for determining execution / non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” and a table for determining execution / non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” are provided. In the table that decides whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” in the table that decides whether to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect, The execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “transition” may be determined individually, so that the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” and the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” may be determined simultaneously.

  After the execution of the process of step S809, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” until the change display to be notified is made based on whether the determination by the process of step S809 and the hold display are being executed in the process of step S809A. After executing the turning effect determining process for determining whether to execute or not executing the turning effect for suggesting that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed based on the determination in the process of step S809 shown in FIG. It is determined whether it is “none” (step S810). At this time, when it is determined that any of the prefetching notice types is determined and not “no notice” (step S810; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect of “hold display”. (Step S811). If it is determined in step S810 that the prefetching notice effect is to be executed, a prefetching notice flag provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of RAM 122 may be set to an on state.

  When it is determined in step S811 that the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is to be executed (step S811; Yes), a plurality of pre-prepared notice effect patterns corresponding to the effect modes in the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect are prepared. One of the patterns is determined (step S812). As an example, in the process of step S812, a pre-prepared notice effect pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining a pre-read notice effect pattern of “hold display”. In the notice effect pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value for determining the notice effect pattern according to the change category transmitted based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to the change display to be notified However, it is only necessary to be assigned to a plurality of notice effect patterns. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 is based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a notice effect pattern extracted from a random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, for example. Referring to the notice effect pattern determination table, the prefetch notice effect pattern of “hold display” may be determined.

  After executing the process of step S812, based on the determination result of the pre-reading notice effect pattern of “hold display”, the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed in a special mode (for example, FIG. 43 ( In step S813, it is determined whether or not to execute a pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” (step S813 ′). Thus, when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is executed, the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H is increased by one due to a shape, pattern or color different from the normal time, or a combination thereof. It may be updated to. In this embodiment, in this step S813, a notice update control is performed and a hold display flag indicating that a prefetch notice effect of “hold display” is being executed is set. This on-hold display flag may be cleared at the end of the change in the on-hold storage in which the on-hold display is executed.

  If it is determined in step S813 ′ that the “mode shift” pre-reading notice effect is to be executed (step S813 ′; Yes), the process proceeds to step S814, and if it is determined that the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect is not to be executed. (Step S813 ′; No), the prefetch determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S811 that the “hold display” prefetching notice effect is not to be executed (step S811; No), the total number of times of prefetching notice effect is set (step S814). For example, in the process of step S814, the prefetch notice type is “special symbol” corresponding to the fact that the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed in preference to the special symbol game using the first special symbol. If the change display to be notified is performed corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure, the fluctuation obtained by subtracting “1” from the second special figure holding memory number is determined. The number of executions of display may be set as the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, if the variable display to be notified is performed corresponding to the special game using the first special figure, the number of executions of the variable display obtained by subtracting “1” from the total reserved memory number is used as the pre-reading notice May be set as the total number of executions. Further, when the pre-reading notice type is determined to be “mode shift”, the total number of pre-reading notice effects may be set without subtracting “1” from the second special figure reserved memory number or the total reserved memory number. .

  After executing the process of step S814, for example, “0” is set as the count initial value of the prefetch notice counter provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the RAM 122 (step S815). Subsequently, predetermined information serving as pre-reading notice execution setting information is stored and stored in, for example, a predetermined area (such as an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 (step S816). The prefetching notice execution setting information may be configured to include information indicating whether the prefetching notice type is “special symbol” or “mode shift”, information indicating the total number of executions of the prefetching notice effect, and the like. . The prefetch advance notice execution setting information may include information (a change display result designation command) indicating the change category received when the change display subject to the advance notice is stored on hold. Further, in the pre-reading advance notice execution setting information, the change display corresponding to the advance notice is a change display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure, or the fluctuation corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure. Information indicating whether it is a display (start opening prize designation command) may be included.

  Then, after performing normal update control to increase the hold display in the start winning storage display area 5H by one in the normal display mode (step S817), the prefetch determination process is terminated. As an example, the start winning memory display area 5H corresponds to the first start winning port and the second starting winning port from the left in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. To the right, a plurality of display parts whose display images are changed are provided. In the process of step S817, when the first start winning prize designation command is received, for example, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) corresponding to the first start winning prize opening (for example, non-display) A round display image is displayed in a predetermined display color (black) on the leftmost display portion of the display portion corresponding to the first start winning opening. On the other hand, in the process of step S817, for example, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) corresponding to the second start winning prize opening (for example, when receiving the second start winning prize specifying command) (for example, A star-shaped display image is displayed in a predetermined display color (white) on the leftmost display portion of the display portion corresponding to the second start winning opening that is not displayed.

  In the prefetch determination process shown in FIG. 29, if it is determined in step S803 that the prefetch notice is being executed, the second start winning interruption determination process is executed in step S804, and then the process proceeds to step S817. , The process of step S809 is restricted from being executed. As a result, in this embodiment, when a pre-announcement effect that is a pre-reading notice is already being executed, the pre-reading notice is further restricted so as not to be changed and duplication of the pre-reading notice is prevented. It should be noted that determination result information (start opening prize designation command) indicating that the variation display result is determined to be “big hit” and determination result information (start opening prize designation command) indicating that the variation display result is determined to be a specific variation pattern are obtained. When a new pre-reading notice is executed, the pre-reading notice being executed may be changed or overlapped midway. Alternatively, regardless of the content of the determination result information, the prefetching notice being executed may be changed or overlapped in the middle so that a new prefetching notice can be executed. Or, for example, while it is possible to execute a new pre-reading notice for the pre-reading notice effect of “pending display”, the pre-reading notice effect for “special symbol” or “mode transition” is changed or overlapped in the middle Whether or not a new prefetch notice can be executed may be made different depending on the prefetch notice type.

  Further, the pre-reading notice process of the present embodiment includes a gaming state designated by a gaming state designation command, a first starting prize designated by a first starting opening prize designation command and a second starting opening prize designation command, Although it is always executed in the effect control process regardless of the second start winning prize, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the effect control process, the game state is shortened by referring to the game state designation command. By determining whether or not the received command includes the first start opening winning designation command, the pre-reading notice process may be executed only during the short time and only in the first starting opening winning.

  In the prefetching notice process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the “holding display” prefetching notice effect is executed in the process of step S811, and when it is determined that the “holding display” prefetching notice effect is not executed (step S811). S811; No), if execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” or “mode shift” is determined, if execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” is determined, the process of step S814 The number of executions of the variable display obtained by subtracting “1” from the second special figure reserved memory number or the number of executions of the variable display obtained by subtracting “1” from the total reserved memory number is set as the total number of pre-reading notice effects. On the other hand, if execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change” is determined, the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are set to “ ”Is set as the total number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect without subtracting“, ”but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined in the process of step S811 that the pre-reading notice effect of“ hold display ”is to be executed. Also in (Step S811; Yes), the process of Step S812 may be executed after executing the same process as in Step S814. As described above, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is to be executed, the total number of pre-reading notice notices is set based on the fact that “hold display” is determined as the pre-reading notice effect. The second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are set as the total number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect without subtracting “1”.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S804 of FIG. 29 as the second start winning interrupt determination process. The second start winning interrupt determination process is executed in preference to the variable display to be notified by the occurrence of the second start winning during the pre-reading notice execution after the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is started. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display is interrupted. In this embodiment, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. On the other hand, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started according to the order in which the second start winnings are generated. Therefore, the interruption of the variable display based on the occurrence of the second start winning may be generated when the pre-reading notice effect is executed with the variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure as a notice target. There is.

  In the second start winning interrupt determination process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a second start winning has occurred (step S601). For example, in the process of step S601, it may be determined whether or not the second start winning has occurred, depending on whether or not the second start opening winning designation command is included in the new received command.

  When the second start winning prize is not generated in Step S601 (Step S601; No), the second start winning interrupt determination process is ended. On the other hand, when the second start winning is generated (step S601; Yes), for example, by reading the prefetching notice execution setting information, there is a mode transition notice execution setting as a setting for executing the prefetching notice effect of “mode shift”. It is determined whether or not (step S602). Then, in response to the mode transition advance notice execution setting (step S602; Yes), for example, is the second start winning interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control flag setting unit 191) of the RAM 122 turned on? It is determined whether or not (step S603). The second start winning interrupt flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S606 described later when the variable display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is interrupted and executed.

  If the second start winning interrupt flag is already on in step S603 (step S603; Yes), the second starting winning interrupt determination process is terminated. At this time, the stored value (interrupt fluctuation display count value) in the interruption fluctuation display counter for counting the number of times the fluctuation display based on the second start winning is interrupted and executed is updated to be incremented by one. Also good. On the other hand, when the second start winning interruption flag is OFF (step S603; No), the remaining number of times of execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is specified as the remaining number of times of the pre-reading notice (step S603). S604). For example, in the process of step S604, the difference between the total number of executions of the prefetching notice effect shown in the prefetching notice execution setting information and the prefetching notice count value which is the stored value of the prefetching notice counter is specified as the remaining number of executions of the prefetching notice. do it.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the remaining number of executions of the prefetch notice specified by the process of step S604 is smaller than the second special figure reservation storage number (step S605). Here, if the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice is less than the second special figure holding storage number, the special figure game using the second special figure executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. Is being executed, the variable display to be notified by the pre-reading notice effect is started, and when the variable display is ended, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is also ended. That is, in this case, the variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is the variable display of the notice target by the prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, if the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice is larger than the second special figure holding storage number, the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice is “1” or more even after all of the special figure games using the second special figure are executed. Then, when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed, the variable display to be notified by the pre-reading notice effect is executed. That is, in this case, the change display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is the change display of the notice target by the prefetch notice effect. When the process of step S605 is executed, a new second start winning is generated in response to the reception of a new second start opening winning designation command. Therefore, when the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice is equal to the second special figure holding storage number when the process of step S605 is executed, the variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is: This means that the subject of advance notice is displayed in a pre-read notice effect.

  FIG. 32 shows a specific example when a change display interrupt based on the occurrence of the second start winning is generated and not generated when the remaining number of executions of the prefetch notice is “2”. As an example, as shown in FIG. 32 (A1), when the first special figure hold memory number is “3” and the second special figure hold memory number is “0”, the special figure using the first special figure is used. The change display corresponding to the second special figure game with the holding number “2” in the game is the change display of the notice target by the prefetch notice effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 (B1), it is assumed that the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning is generated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 32 (C1), the second special figure holding storage number is “1”. In the process of step S605 shown in FIG. 31, it is determined that “2”, which is the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice, is larger than “1”, which is the second special figure holding storage number. Then, since the special figure game using the second special figure is preferentially executed, the variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is started before the variable display of the notice target is started. Is started, and a variable display interruption based on the second start winning is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (A2), when the first special figure hold memory number is “1” and the second special figure hold memory number is also “1”, the special game using the first special figure is used. Among them, the variable display corresponding to the first special figure game with the hold number “1” is the variable display of the notice target by the pre-read notice effect. At this time, when the second start winning is generated as shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the second special figure holding memory number becomes “2” as shown in FIG. 32 (C2). In this case, in the process of step S605 shown in FIG. 31, it is determined that “2”, which is the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice, is the same (equal) as “2”, which is the second special figure holding storage number. Then, since the special figure game using the second special figure is preferentially executed, the variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is started before the variable display of the notice target is started. Is started, and a variable display interruption based on the second start winning is generated.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32 (A3), when the first special figure hold memory number is “3” and the second special figure hold memory number is “2”, the special figure game using the second special figure is used. Among them, the variable display corresponding to the second special figure game with the holding number “2” is the variable display of the notice target by the pre-read notice effect. At this time, when the second start winning is generated as shown in FIG. 32 (B3), the second special figure holding memory number becomes “3” as shown in FIG. 32 (C3). In this case, in the process of step S605 shown in FIG. 31, it is determined that “2”, which is the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice, is smaller than “3”, which is the second special figure holding storage number. Then, since the special game using the second special figure is started according to the order in which the second start winnings are generated, the change display of the notice target is executed, and then the second game shown in FIG. 32 (B3). The variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure based on the occurrence of the second start winning is started, and the interruption of the variable display based on the second start winning is not generated.

  When the second start winning as shown in FIG. 32 (B1) or (B2) occurs three or more times consecutively, the second special figure holding memory number becomes “3” or more, and step S605 shown in FIG. In this process, it may be determined that the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice is larger than the second special figure holding storage number. On the other hand, the process of step S605 corresponds to a new received command or the like each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process shown in FIG. 28 based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt on the effect control board 12 side. Can be executed. Therefore, for example, when the process of step S605 is executed in response to the second start winning that occurs first out of the three second start winnings, the second special figure holding storage number is “1”, so It can be determined that the total number of executions is equal to or greater than the second special figure reservation storage number, and that a variable display interruption based on the second start winning has occurred.

  As described above, when it is determined in the process of step S605 shown in FIG. 31 that the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice is smaller than the second special figure reservation storage number (step S605; Yes), the variable display based on the second start winning prize is performed. Therefore, the second start winning interrupt determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice is greater than or equal to the second special figure holding storage number (step S605; No), in response to the occurrence of a variable display interruption based on the second start winning, The second start winning interruption flag is set to the on state (step S606). If the second start prize interrupt flag is turned on in response to the second start prize that occurred first, the fact that a variable display interrupt has occurred is generated regardless of how many times the second start prize has occurred. Can be identified.

  Following the process of step S606, it is determined whether or not a predetermined mode change condition is satisfied (step S607). The mode change condition is a condition for changing the effect mode that has already been shifted to another effect mode by executing the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift”. In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of pre-reading notice modes that are transitional modes that can be shifted by executing the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift”, the sudden notice mode, the 15R notice mode, and the common notice mode are: Prepared in advance. The sudden warning mode may be controlled to a short-term open big hit state in which a short open round is executed when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” in the variable display subject to notice. It is a production mode that suggests that. The 15R notice mode is controlled to the normally open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. It is a production mode that suggests that there is a possibility of being. In the common notice mode, the fluctuation display result can be “big hit” and the big hit type can be “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, and the possibility of being controlled to a short-term open big hit state and normal This is an effect mode that suggests that there is a possibility of being controlled to an open big hit state. Note that it is possible to suggest that the rush prediction mode may be controlled not only in the short-term open big hit state but also in the small hit gaming state when the variation display result is “small hit”.

  FIG. 33 shows a setting example of the mode change condition. In the setting example shown in FIG. 33, when the pre-reading advance notice mode is either the sudden advance notice mode or the 15R advance notice mode, the mode change is performed in response to the variation category of the reserved memory due to the second start winning being the predetermined content. The condition is met. The variation category here is a variation category indicated by the second start opening winning designation command included in the new received command. More specifically, the mode change condition is satisfied when the variation category is any one of “big hit”, “super reach”, “non-reach / other loses” in the sudden warning mode. On the other hand, in the 15R notice mode, the mode change condition is satisfied if the variation category is any one of “accuracy”, “small hit”, “super reach”, “non-reach / other lose”.

  In this way, in the sudden warning mode that suggests that there may be a short-term open big hit state or a small hit game state, the variation category based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize corresponds to the content suggested by the sudden warning mode The mode transition condition is satisfied when the variation category is different from the “accuracy” and “small hit”. Further, when the 15R notice mode suggests that there is a possibility of a normal open big hit state, the variation category based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize is different from the “big hit” corresponding to the suggested contents in the 15R notice mode. The mode change condition is satisfied when the category is a variation category. As a result, the mode is changed to the common notice mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, only when the mode change condition shown in FIG. 33 is satisfied, the mode is changed to the notice mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and simply, You may make it change into common notice mode uniformly on the condition that the 2nd starting prize has occurred.

  When the mode change condition is satisfied in step S607 shown in FIG. 31 (step S607; Yes), for example, a mode change flag provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is set to an ON state (step S607). S608). Then, after performing control for executing a predetermined winning mode change notification (step S609), the second start winning interrupt determination process is terminated. In the process of step S609, for example, an effect control pattern stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 is read for use in winning mode change notification and set as a use pattern, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5. Displaying above, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and playing games by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14 The effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on / off / flashed, or a part or all of these are executed in combination.

  When it is determined in step S602 that there is no mode transition advance notice execution setting and there is a special symbol advance execution setting as a setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” (step S602; No), the “special symbol” For the pre-reading notice effect, after setting the execution contents to be changeable (step S610), the second start winning interruption determination process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S610, it is determined whether or not a variable display interruption based on the second start winning is generated by the same process as in steps S604 and S605. It is only necessary to perform a predetermined setting such as a setting for canceling the process or a setting for increasing the total number of executions.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S809A in FIG. In the roaring effect determination process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first extracts the random effect SR2 for determining the roaring effect from the random number circuit 124, the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the like (step S750). Then, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is determined in step S809 in FIG. 29 (step S751). If the “mode shift” pre-reading notice effect has not been determined (step S751; No), the process proceeds to step S752. If the “mode changing” pre-reading notice effect has been determined (step S751; Yes), the process proceeds to step S753. move on.

  In step S752, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is determined in step S809 of FIG. 29 (step S752). When the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is not determined (step S752; No), the process proceeds to step S755, and when the “holding display” pre-reading notice effect is determined (step S752; Yes), the process proceeds to step S754. move on.

  In step S753, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is being executed or whether the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect has been determined (step S753). Note that whether or not the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is being executed may be determined by determining whether or not the hold display flag is set. If the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is being executed, or if the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is determined (step S753; Yes), the process proceeds to step S754, and the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is being executed. If the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is not determined (step S753; No), the process proceeds to step 755.

  When the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is determined in step S752 (step S752; Yes), or when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is being executed in step S753 (step S753; Yes), In step S754, the turn effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 35 is selected, and the ratio corresponding to the execution decision / execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” based on the random value SR2 for determination of the turn effect execution, The variation display effect pattern control set in the later-described variation display start setting process is determined to be a turning effect execution pattern or a turning effect non-execution pattern (step S754), and the process proceeds to step S756.

  In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is not being executed in step S753 (step S753; No), the turning effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 35 is selected in step S755, and the effect for determining the turning effect is determined. Based on the numerical value SR2, the variation display effect pattern control set in the variable display start setting process described later is performed at a rate corresponding to the non-execution of the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect. The pattern is determined (step S755), and the process proceeds to step S756.

  The turn effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 35 is a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random effect execution determination random value SR2 according to either hold display execution determination / hold display execution or hold display non-execution. Value) is assigned to the turn production execution pattern and the turn production non-execution pattern. More specifically, during the hold display execution decision / hold display execution, from 1 to 100 of the determination value, that is, the whole range of the random effect SR2 for determining the turn effect execution is assigned to the turn effect non-execution pattern. In the hold display non-execution, the determination values 1 to 80 are assigned to the turning effect execution pattern, and the determination values 81 to 100 are assigned to the turning effect non-execution pattern. For this reason, when the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect and the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect are determined at the same time, and during the execution of the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect, the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect is displayed. When it is determined, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is executed without executing the turning effect (see FIG. 43).

  In the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the turn production execution pattern and the turn production non-execution pattern is different between the execution decision / execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” and the non-execution pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio between the execution effect execution pattern and the non-execution execution pattern is different between the execution decision / execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” and the non-execution pattern. Also good.

  Then, in step S756, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the turn effect execution pattern is determined in step S754 or step S755 (step S756), and if the turn effect execution pattern is determined (step S756). S756; Yes), the fact that the execution pattern of the turn effect is determined is stored and the process is terminated. If the turn effect execution pattern is not determined (step S756; No), the process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode in which the production effect is executed / non-executed is determined by determining the production control pattern of the mode transition including the production production execution pattern or the production production non-execution pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and the execution / non-execution of the squeak effect may be determined separately from the execution / non-execution of the mode transition. When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the transition is decided, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the “hold display” is decided or the pre-announcement notice effect of the “hold display” is being executed. By determining, it is only necessary to limit the execution of the roaring effect.

  After the prefetching notice process is executed in step S161 shown in FIG. 28, any of the processes in steps S170 to S177 as described below is performed according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variation display start waiting process determines whether or not to start the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variation display start setting process corresponds to the effect symbol on the effect display device 5 in response to the fact that the variation display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various fluctuation display operations and other various presentation operations, a process of determining a fixed presentation pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like are included.

  The variation display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variation display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, Various effects are controlled during variable display. After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the change display of the effect symbol is read from the effect control pattern at the time of special symbol change, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to the above, the finalized design symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variation display result of the production symbol is displayed as a complete stop. If the finalized design is displayed in full stop in response to the end code being read from the special pattern variation production control pattern, the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is displayed. Even if it does not depend on the effect control command from the main board 11, the effect display board can autonomously derive and display the determined effect symbol on the side of the effect control board 12 to determine the variable display result. When the confirmed effect symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the effect display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the display screen of the effect display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 of FIG. 28 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 36, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A to determine whether or not a variable display result designation command has been received (step S521a). That is, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the variable display. If the change display result designation command has been received (step S521a; Yes), it is determined whether or not the subsequent change pattern reception flag and the previous change pattern reception flag are set (step S521b). When the post-change pattern reception flag and the pre-change pattern reception flag are set (step S521b), the process proceeds to step S521c. It should be noted that when the variation display result designation command is not received in the process of step 521a (step S521a; No), and when the post-variation pattern reception flag and the previous variation pattern reception flag are not set in the process of step S521b (step S521a). S521b; No) both proceed to step S535, and after updating the value of the effect process flag to “0” which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S535), the variable display start setting process is terminated. .

  Next, in step 521c, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the previous variation pattern and the subsequent variation pattern by referring to the received previous variation pattern designation command and the subsequent variation pattern designation command. Then, in step 522, for example, by reading the EXT data in the variable display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “lost” (step S522). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S522; Yes), the fluctuation pattern specified in step 521c corresponds to the case where the fluctuation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not the pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), a combination of a definite effect symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 5L in the display area of the effect display device 5 is determined among the determined effect symbols. Next, numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the right confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 5R in the display area of the effect display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the determination is made so that the symbol number of the right determined effect symbol is different from the symbol number of the left determined effect symbol by the setting in the right determined symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., among the confirmed effect symbols, the medium determined effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C in the display area of the effect display device 5 is determined. Note that, in the process of step S524, the determined effect symbol of the non-reach combination that becomes the predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined corresponding to the case where the variable symbol preview is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), a combination of a definite effect symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for left / right fixed symbol determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left / right confirmed symbol determination table, the “left” and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the effect display device 5 of the confirmed effect symbols are stopped and displayed together. The effect symbols having the same symbol number are determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the middle fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the determined effect symbols, the medium determined effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C in the display area of the effect display device 5 are determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed effect symbol becomes a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed effect symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol and the right confirmed effect symbol, any value For example, by adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the medium finalized effect symbol, the finalized symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium defined effect symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left defined effect symbol and the right confirmed effect symbol may be determined, and the medium defined effect symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S522; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S526). When it is determined that “surprise” or “small hit” is determined (step S526; Yes), it is determined whether the variation pattern specified in step S521 is a reach variation pattern (step S526a). If it is not the reach variation pattern, for example, a combination of a definite effect symbol that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “probability” or “small hit”, such as an opening chance, is determined (step S527a). As an example, the combination of the definite effect design which becomes the last stop design which comprises either among a plurality of types of opening chances is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for chance eye determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. It is sufficient to determine the combination of the definitive effect symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes by referring to the above.

  On the other hand, in the case of the reach variation pattern, the combination of the definite effect symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting any one of the plural types of outlier reach is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for reach eye determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined reach eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. It is sufficient to determine the combination of the definite effect symbols that constitute one of the reach eyes by referring to the above.

  When it is determined in step S526 that it is a "non-probable big hit" or "probable big hit" other than "surprise accuracy" or "small hit" (step S526; No), a definitive effect that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination. The combination of symbols is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by a random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are stopped and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5. A production symbol having the same symbol number is determined. At this time, a determination may be made that a different effect symbol is a determined effect symbol depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the jackpot. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the plurality of types of normal symbols is selected and determined as a definite production symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one of the effect symbols is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols, and a definite effect symbol combination that constitutes a non-probability variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination is selected. It is sufficient to make a determination. At this time, when it is determined that the confirmed effect symbol of the non-probable variation jackpot combination is not notified that the control is changed to the probability variation state in the re-lottery effect during the variable display, it is executed corresponding to the jackpot gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the confirmed effect symbol of the probability variation big hit combination, a notification that the probability variation state is controlled is performed in the re-lottery effect during the variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527a, S527b, and S528, a prefetch notice effect setting process is performed (step S529). The prefetching notice effect setting process is a process for performing settings for executing these prefetching notice effects when it is decided to execute the prefetching notice effects of “special symbol” or “mode shift”. After executing the process of step S529, it is determined whether or not there is a memory effect execution pattern stored, that is, whether or not the process of step S757 shown in FIG. 34 is executed and the sound effect execution pattern is stored. (Step S530). If no turn effect execution pattern is stored (step S530; No), an effect control pattern including a turn effect non-execution effect pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step S532 (step S531a). Is stored (step S530; Yes), an effect control pattern including an effect pattern for executing the roaring effect is selected and the process proceeds to step S532 (step S531b).

  After executing the processing of step S531a and step S531b, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified in step S521c (step S532). ). Subsequently, the setting for starting the variation of the effect symbol and the like in the effect display device 5 is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special-flight variation effect control pattern) set in step S531b and step S529d is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Thus, the variation of the effect symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the effect display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the variable display (step S534), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in step S521a of the variable display start setting process, the start timing of the variable display is determined based on whether or not the variable display result designation command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If, for example, the above-mentioned reserved memory number subtraction designation command is transmitted, it is determined whether or not the pending memory number subtraction designation command is received and it is determined that the timing for starting the variable display is reached. You may make it do.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S529 of FIG. 36 as the prefetch notice effect setting process.

  In the prefetching notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 37, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not prefetching notice execution setting information is stored in a predetermined area (such as an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122, for example (step). S701). At this time, if the pre-reading notice execution setting information is not stored (step S701; No), the prefetching notice effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is storage of pre-reading notice execution setting information (step S701; Yes), the pre-reading notice count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S702). The prefetch notice counter is set to “0” that is the initial count value when the process of step S815 shown in FIG. 29 is executed. Thereafter, each time the process of step S702 is executed, the prefetch notice count value is incremented by one.

  Following the processing of step S702, for example, it is determined whether or not the “pre-designed notice” prefetching notice effect is executed corresponding to the prefetching notice type specified from the prefetching notice execution setting information (step S703). At this time, if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” is to be executed (step S703; Yes), part or all of the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the current variation display where the start condition is satisfied. Is replaced with a special effect symbol different from the normal effect symbol, or an effect symbol having a predetermined combination as a chance event symbol (step S704). As a result, in the variable display in which the pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” is executed, a part or all of the effect symbol that is finally stopped and displayed is a combination effect symbol that is predetermined as a special effect symbol or a chance event symbol. It can be.

  After the process of step S704 is executed, it is determined whether or not the prefetch notice count value has reached the total number of prefetch notice effects (step S705). The total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect is set in advance by the process of step S814 shown in FIG. If the prefetch notice count value has not reached the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect in step S705 (step S705; No), the prefetch notice effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice count value reaches the total number of executions of the prefetching notice effect (step S705; Yes), the memory of the prefetching notice execution setting information is deleted as a setting for ending the prefetch notice effect of “special symbol”. (Step S706). As a result, the memory of the prefetching notice type is erased and the memory of the total number of executions of the prefetching notice effect is erased. Further, the prefetch notice counter is cleared and its count value is initialized to “0”.

  If it is determined in step S703 that it is not the “special symbol” prefetching notice effect but the “mode change” prefetching notice effect (step S703; No), a predetermined mode transition notice setting process is executed (step S703). S707), the pre-reading notice effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S707 of FIG. 37 as the mode transition advance notice setting process. In the mode transition advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 38, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the second start winning interrupt flag is on (step S721). The second start winning interrupt flag is set to the on state in the process of step S606 shown in FIG. 31 due to the occurrence of the second start winning during execution of the pre-reading notice effect. If the second start winning interrupt flag is off (step S721; No), it is determined whether or not it is the mode transition notice start time corresponding to the variable display for starting the execution of the prefetch notice effect of “mode transition”. Determination is made (step S722). For example, in the process of step S722, it is determined whether or not the “pre-prediction notice effect” of “mode shift” is executed corresponding to the prefetch notice type specified from the prefetch notice execution setting information. At this time, when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is executed, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice count value is “1”. Then, when it is determined that the pre-reading notice count value is “1”, it may be determined that the mode transition notice start time is reached. If it is determined that the “mode shift” pre-reading notice effect is not executed, or if it is determined that the pre-reading notice count value is other than “1”, it may be determined that the mode change notice is not started.

  If it is determined in step S722 that the mode transition notice starts (step S722; Yes), the effect mode to be executed by executing the “mode change” prefetch notice effect is changed to a plurality of types of prefetch notice modes. Either one is determined (step S723). As an example, in the process of step S723, a pre-read preview mode determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the pre-read preview mode. In the prefetching advance notice mode determination table, if a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number value for determining the prefetching advance notice mode is assigned to a plurality of types of prefetch advance notice modes such as the sudden notice notice mode, the 15R notice mode, and the common notice mode. Good. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetching notice mode determination table based on numerical data indicating random number values for prefetching notice mode determination extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit. What is necessary is just to determine the prefetch notice mode used as the production mode of a transfer destination.

  FIG. 39A shows an example of the prefetching advance notice mode determination ratio by the process of step S723, and this example of the prefetching advance notice mode determination ratio corresponds to the change display to be noticed by the prefetch notice effect of “mode shift”. The pre-reading advance notice mode is determined according to the variation category by the start opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command) transmitted and the second special figure reserved memory number. The ratio is different. The variation category corresponding to the variation display to be notified and the second special figure holding storage number may be specified from the stored contents of the command in the start winning reception command buffer 194A.

  In the example of determination shown in FIG. 39A, when the variation category is “big hit”, the 15R notice mode or the common notice mode is decided at a predetermined rate, but the sudden notice mode is not decided. The Further, when the variation category is “other (accuracy)”, it is determined so that it is determined at a predetermined rate to the acknowledgment notice mode or the common notice mode, but not to the 15R notice mode. Even when the variation category is “small hit”, the sudden warning mode or the common warning mode is determined at a predetermined rate, while the 15R warning mode is limited.

  When the fluctuation category is “other than the above (losing)”, it is determined to be one of the sudden warning mode, the 15R warning mode, and the common warning mode at a predetermined ratio that differs depending on the second special figure holding memory number. As an example, when the second special figure reservation storage number is “0”, the common special notice mode is not determined (the determination ratio is 0/100), whereas the second special figure reservation storage number is “1” or When it is “2”, the common notice mode is determined at a ratio of 20/100, and when the second special figure reservation storage number is “3” or “4”, the common notice mode is determined at a ratio of 40/100. Is done. As a result, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect that shifts to the sudden prediction mode or the 15R notice mode is not started, the pre-reading notice effect that shifts to the common notice mode is executed at a different rate according to the number of the second special figure hold memory. You can decide whether or not to do so.

  In such a setting, when the mode is shifted to the 15R advance notice mode, the change display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” in the variable display to be notified in the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change”. On the other hand, there is no possibility that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In addition, when shifting to the sudden warning mode, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” and the big hit type will be “surprise” or the fluctuation display result may be “small hit” in the fluctuation display subject to notice. On the other hand, there is no possibility that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. When changing to the common notice mode, in the fluctuation display subject to notice, the fluctuation display result may be “big hit” and the big hit type may be “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “surprise change”. The display result may be “small hit”.

  As described above, when the production mode is shifted to the 15R notice mode due to the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change”, the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, so that normally open big hit It can be suggested that the state may be controlled. On the other hand, when shifting to the 15R notice mode, it is not suggested that there is a possibility of being controlled to the short-term open big hit state by the fluctuation display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “surprise”. Further, when the mode is shifted to the sudden warning mode, it can be suggested that there is a possibility of being controlled in the short-term open big hit state, but there is no suggestion that there is a possibility of being controlled in the normal open big hit state. When shifting to the common notice mode, it can be suggested that there is a possibility of being controlled in either the short-term open big hit state or the normal open big hit state.

  After the process of step S723 is executed, it is determined whether or not the determined prefetch notice mode is the common notice mode (step S724). At this time, if it is determined that the common notice mode is set (step S724; Yes), whether or not the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect is “3” or more that is predetermined as the common notice mode determination value. Is determined (step S725). When the total number of executions is less than “3” (step S725; No), the common notice A mode is determined to be the transition destination effect mode among the plurality of types of common notice modes (step S726). On the other hand, when the total number of executions is “3” or more (step S725; Yes), the common notice B mode is determined as the transition effect mode among the plurality of types of common notice modes (step S727). Thus, when the pre-reading notice mode is set to the common notice mode, a different common notice mode among the plurality of types of common notice modes may be determined as the transition-destination effect mode according to the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect. .

  In addition, it is not limited to what is determined in the common notice mode different according to the total number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect. The previous production mode may be determined. Alternatively, the transition-destination effect mode may be determined from among a plurality of types of common notice modes at different ratios depending on whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” in the variable display to be notified. Alternatively, the transition-destination effect mode may be determined among a plurality of types of common notice modes at different ratios depending on whether the current game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state.

  If the second start winning interrupt flag is ON in step S721 (step S721; Yes), the stored content of the start winning reception command buffer 194A is checked (step S728). At this time, the start is made to notify the determination result that the second special figure holding storage number and the variable display result are determined as “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state from the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. What is necessary is just to specify the presence or absence of a winning prize designation command. Based on such a check result, a setting is made to change the number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect (step S729). Further, the second start winning interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S730).

  As an example of the setting in step S729, when the variation display result in the variation display that is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning is “losing”, the number of the variation display that is performed by the interruption is What is necessary is just to add to the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect. What is necessary is just to specify the frequency | count of the fluctuation | variation display performed by interruption from an interruption fluctuation | variation display count value. As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in response to the fact that the change display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is interrupted and executed before the change display subject to the notice in the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect. By increasing the number of times of change display, it is possible to extend the pre-reading notice effect to the change display subject to the notice. As another example, if there is a variation display that results in a “big hit” among the variation displays that are interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the variation display is a new advance notice for the pre-reading notice effect. What is necessary is just to change the total number of executions of a prefetch notice effect so that it may become object. More specifically, on the basis of the check result obtained in step S728, the number of times of change display executed until the change display result becomes “big hit” is specified. The specified variable display count may be set as the total number of executions of the new prefetch notice effect.

  After executing the processing of step S730, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a mode transition notice (step S731). When it is determined that it is time to start the mode transition notice (step S731; Yes), the process proceeds to step S723, and the prefetch notice mode is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode change notice is not started (step S731; No), it is determined whether or not the mode change flag is on (step S732). The mode change flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S608 shown in FIG. 31 based on the fact that a predetermined mode change condition is satisfied when the second start winning is generated.

  If it is determined in step S732 that the mode change flag is on (step S732; Yes), after the mode change flag is cleared and turned off (step S733), the second special figure holding storage number is Then, it is determined whether or not the post-change notice mode determination value is equal to or greater than “3” determined in advance (step S734). When the second special figure reservation storage number is less than “3” (step S734; No), the common notice A mode is set to the changed effect mode among the plural kinds of common notice modes (step S735). . On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation storage number is “3” or more (step S734; Yes), the common notice B mode is set to the effect mode after the change among the plural kinds of common notice modes ( Step S736). Thus, when changing the pre-reading advance notice mode to the common advance notice mode, if a different common notice mode is selected from the plurality of types of common notice modes according to the second special figure hold storage number, the changed effect mode is determined. Good.

  In addition, it is not limited to what is decided in the common notice mode different according to the 2nd special figure reservation memory number, for example, it changes in the ratio which differs according to the 2nd special figure reservation memory number among plural types of common notice modes A later production mode may be determined. Alternatively, the changed effect mode may be determined from among a plurality of types of common notice modes at different ratios depending on whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” in the variable display to be notified. Alternatively, the effect mode after change may be determined from among a plurality of types of common notice modes at different ratios depending on whether the current game state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the short time state.

  Thereafter, a setting for executing a predetermined effect is performed in accordance with each pre-reading notice mode (step S737). In this case, for example, the current prefetching advance notice mode, the prefetching notice count value, whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” in the fluctuation display to be noticed, or any prefetching including a part or all of these. A notice effect pattern for executing a prescribed effect in each prefetch notice mode may be determined at a predetermined ratio based on the notice pattern determination condition. Alternatively, in correspondence with the current prefetching notice mode, a prefetching notice effect is provided for any effect form including an effect image or sound effect output as a background image, a lighting mode of a light emitter, or a combination of some or all of these. Regardless of the number of executions, the setting for a predetermined production mode may be made.

  As a specific example, FIG. 39 (B) shows a notice effect pattern determination ratio in the common notice B mode in which the notice effect pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns when the prefetch notice mode is the common notice B mode. An example is shown. In the example of the notice effect pattern determination ratio in the common notice B mode shown in FIG. 39 (B), the notice effect pattern is one of a plurality of patterns at a predetermined ratio that differs depending on the second special figure holding memory number and the variable display result. It is determined. For example, when the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, if the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern B0X is the highest, and if the fluctuation display result is “small hit”, the notice effect If the determination ratio of the pattern B0Y is the highest and the variation display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the notice effect pattern B0Z is the highest. When the second special figure reserved memory number is “1”, it is determined as one of the notice effect patterns B1X, B1Y, B1Z different from the case where the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”. With this setting, when in the common advance notice B mode, some or all of the effect aspects of the prefetch notice effect can be made different according to the number of second special figure hold storage.

  In addition, it is not limited to what determines a notice effect pattern in a different ratio according to the 2nd special figure reservation memory | storage number at the time of the process of step S737, For example, in predetermined look-ahead notice modes, such as common notice B mode The notice effect pattern may be determined at a different rate depending on the number of second special figure holding memory when the decision to start the prefetch notice effect is made. More specifically, when a pre-reading notice effect with a variable display based on the second start winning prize is executed, the notice effect pattern is determined at a different rate depending on the total number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect. May be. Also, the notice effect pattern may be determined at a different rate depending on not only the total number of times of the prefetch notice effect but also the prefetch notice count value. Alternatively, the notice effect pattern may be determined at a different rate depending on the remaining number of executions of the prefetch notice when the process of step S737 is executed.

  That is, in the process of step S737, even in the same pre-reading notice mode, a notice effect with different contents (effects) is executed according to the number of special figure hold memories when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is started. The notice effect pattern may be determined as described above. For example, if the number of special figure hold memory when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is started is “1”, the possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” in the next fluctuation display is suggested only in the current fluctuation display. A notice effect pattern for executing an effect that only needs to be executed once, such as a single notice notice to be performed, may be determined. On the other hand, when the number of special figure hold memories when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is started is “2” or more, a series of stories progresses over a plurality of fluctuation displays, so that the fluctuation display in the fluctuation display of the notice target A notice effect pattern for executing an effect that is completed by executing a plurality of times, such as a story effect notice that suggests the possibility of the result being a “big hit”, may be determined. Alternatively, the notice effect pattern may be determined such that the notice effect in which the contents of the effect (effect mode) change is executed for each variable display after the execution of the prefetch notice effect is started.

  After the process of step S737 is executed, it is determined whether or not the prefetch notice count value has reached the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect (step S738). At this time, if the total number of pre-reading notice effects has not been reached (step S738; No), the mode transition notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the total number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect is reached (step S738; Yes), the predetermined mode transition notice end flag is set to the on state (step S739), and the memory of the prefetching notice execution setting information is erased. From (step S740), the mode transition notice setting process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading notice mode is either the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode, the variation category of the second start winning hold memory is a variation category corresponding to the advance notice mode. Although an example in which the mode change condition is satisfied and the mode is shifted to the common advance notice mode is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode change condition is satisfied even when the prefetch advance notice mode is the common advance notice mode. The mode may be changed with. In the common advance notice mode in this case, for example, when the variation category of the second start winning hold memory is “big hit”, “surprise”, “small hit”, the mode transition change condition is satisfied, If the variation category of the reserved memory of the start winning is “big hit”, the 15R notice mode is set, and the variation category of the reserved memory of the second start winning is “accurate”. If it is “small hit”, it is only necessary to shift to the sudden warning mode.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of FIG. 28 as the variable display effect process. In the effect processing during variation display shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S551). ). As an example, in the process of step S551, when the production control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction) and an end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the updated production control process timer value, etc. What is necessary is just to determine with the fluctuation | variation display time having passed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S551 (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not it is a turning effect execution period for executing the turning effect (step S552). The roaring effect execution period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern selected by the process of step S531b shown in FIG. When it is not the turning effect execution period in step S552 (step S552; No), the process proceeds to step S553, and when it is the turning effect execution period in step S552 (step S552; Yes), for example, in the display area of the effect display device 5 In the state where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 5L and the “right” effect symbol display area 5R, the “middle” effect symbol display area 5C is switched to, for example, the pre-reading notice mode. For example, display effect control for executing a roaring effect is performed (step S552 ′) and the process proceeds to step S553.

  In step S553, it is determined whether or not it is a prefetching notice effect execution period for executing the prefetching notice effect (step S553). The pre-reading notice effect execution period is, for example, in the effect control pattern selected by the process of steps S531a and 531b shown in FIG. , It may be determined in advance. When it is the prefetching notice effect execution period in step S553 (step S553; Yes), for example, an effect operation for executing the prefetching notice effect such as display of an effect image informing that the transition to the prefetching notice mode is recognizable. Control is performed (step S553 ′). In the process of step S553 ′, for example, from the effect control pattern selected by the processes of steps S531a and 531b shown in FIG. The effect control execution data is read out. Various commands created based on the production control execution data read out in this way are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on, blinked, or turned off. Or, it is only necessary that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by combining some or all of them.

  When the performance state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 shifts to the prefetching advance notice mode by the production operation control in the process of step S553 ′, it is possible to specify the prefetching advance mode, for example, by updating the stored data in the production mode buffer. It may be memorized. Further, the effect control CPU 120 reads the address setting of the effect control pattern read from the ROM 121 (base register value for the base address, etc.) from the storage address corresponding to the effect mode before transition (normal effect mode, etc.). It is only necessary to change the effect mode in various effects including the change display of effect symbols by changing to the storage address corresponding to.

  When it is determined in step S553 that it is not the pre-reading notice effect execution period (step S553; No), after the process of step S553 ′ is executed, it is a reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S556). The reach effect execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern selected according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in step S556 that it is the reach effect execution period (step S556; Yes), effect operation control for executing the reach effect is performed based on, for example, effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern. (Step S557).

  When it is determined in step S556 that it is not the reach effect execution period (step S556; No), after executing the process of step S557, for example, setting in the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the variation pattern Based on the effect operation control including the variation display operation of the effect symbol based on the other (step S558), the variation display effect processing is ended.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S551 (step S551; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S559). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S559; No), the variation display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S559 (step S559; Yes), for example, in the variation display of the effect symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol (determined effect symbol) as a display result is performed (step S560). At this time, a predetermined fixed time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S561). Further, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S562). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the mode transition notice end flag is on (step S563). The mode transition advance notice end flag is set to the on state when the process of step S739 shown in FIG. 38 is executed in response to the execution of the variable display to be notified by the prefetch notice effect of “mode change”. Is done.

  If the mode transition advance notice end flag is OFF in step S563 (step S563; No), the variation display effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the mode transition notice end flag is on (step S563; Yes), after setting for returning to the normal effect mode (step S564), the effect processing during variable display is ended. For example, in the process of step S564, the storage data of the effect mode buffer may be initialized and stored so that it is possible to specify that it is not the pre-reading notice mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes (initializes) the effect control pattern address setting (base address value for the base address, etc.) read from the ROM 121 to a storage address corresponding to the normal effect mode, thereby producing the effect symbol. It is only necessary to be able to switch the effect modes in various effects including the variable display.

  Next, the execution mode of the roaring effect will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 (A) and 42 (A), the first special figure holding storage number is “2” when the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. It is assumed that the hold display corresponding to the second special figure hold storage number “0” is performed in the start winning storage display area 5H.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (A) and FIG. 41 (B), when the game ball wins the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A during the change of the production design, for example, the change of the winning It is determined that the display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and “mode shift” is determined as the type of the pre-reading notice in the process of step S809 shown in FIG. 29, and the change is made in the process of step S809A and the process of step S531b. When the effect execution pattern is selected, first, as shown in FIG. 41C, the start winning hold display is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss. .

  As shown in FIG. 41 (D), when the display of variation of the effect symbol is newly started in response to the first reserved memory number being “3”, the screen shown in FIGS. 41 (E) and 41 (F) is displayed. As shown in the figure, after the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R, a symbol indicating that the pre-reading notice mode is to be shifted is displayed in the effect symbol display area 5C while reducing the fluctuation speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 41 (G), a symbol indicating that the mode is shifted to the prefetching advance notice mode is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 5C. Subsequently, when a new variable display is started in response to the first reserved storage number being “2”, pre-reading notice execution setting information for executing the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is stored. Therefore, the mode transition notice setting process is executed. Here, the pre-reading notice mode is determined to be the sudden notice mode by the process of step S723 based on the determination that the second start winning interrupt flag is OFF by the process of step S721. Then, according to the effect execution setting by the process of step S737, for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (H), an effect operation for displaying an effect image showing the dragonfly character MC1 and an effect image showing the frog character MC2 is included. The pre-reading notice effect in the sudden notice mode is started.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 (A) and 42 (B), for example, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A during the change of the production symbol, for example, the winning 29 is determined to be “losing”, “no notice” is determined as the type of pre-reading notice in the process of step S809 shown in FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 42C, the start winning hold display is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss. .

  As shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the display of variation of the effect symbol is newly started in response to the first reserved memory number being “3”, it is shown in FIG. 42 (E) and FIG. 42 (F). As shown in the figure, after the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R, a symbol indicating that the pre-reading notice mode is shifted is displayed in the effect symbol display area 5C while reducing the fluctuation speed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 42 (G) and 42 (H), the design indicating the transition to the pre-reading notice mode does not stop in the effect design display area 5C, and the other effect design stops. The symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a loss. When a new variable display is started in response to the first reserved memory number being “2”, the normal display of variable effect display is executed without executing the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” Is done.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B), the first special figure hold memory number is “1” and the second special figure hold memory number when the effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the state where the hold display corresponding to “0” is performed in the start winning memory display area 5H and the hold display is displayed in a normal manner (for example, “●” display). When the game ball wins the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A during the variation of the symbol, for example, it is determined that the fluctuation display result of the winning is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, In the process of step S809 shown in FIG. 29, when “hold display” + “mode shift” is determined as the pre-reading notice effect, the turn-off effect non-execution pattern is selected in the process of step S809A and the process of step S531a. As shown in FIG. 43 (C), when the first special figure holding storage number becomes “2” due to the first start winning that occurred in FIG. 43 (B), in the start winning storage display area 5H, A pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” having a different shape from the normal hold display is executed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 43 (D), the start winning hold display is displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (E), when the change display of the effect symbol is newly started in response to the first reserved memory number being “2”, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is executed. Since the pre-reading notice execution setting information for storing is stored, the mode transition notice setting process is executed. Here, the pre-reading notice mode is determined to be the sudden notice mode by the process of step S723 based on the determination that the second start winning interrupt flag is OFF by the process of step S721. Then, according to the effect execution setting by the process of step S737, for example, as shown in FIG. 43E, an effect operation for displaying an effect image showing the dragonfly character MC1 and an effect image showing the frog character MC2 is included. The pre-reading notice effect in the sudden notice mode is started.

  Note that, in FIG. 43 of the present embodiment, an example in which the sudden warning mode is started by executing the variable display in which the turning effect is not executed because “hold display” + “mode shift” is determined as the pre-reading warning effect, That is, although the example in which the pre-reading effect of “hold display” is determined is shown, for example, the second special figure hold memory in the start winning memory display area 5H does not exist in advance, and the first special figure hold memory is stored. Even in the case where the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” having a different shape from the normal hold display is executed in the corresponding hold display, the first start winning is generated, and thus the fluctuation display result of the win is “big hit” When the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, the game ball is won at the first start winning opening, so that in the process of step S809A and the process of step S531a, the spear effect non-execution process is performed. Over down is selected, the variable display of the starting winning is adapted lookahead announcement attraction is started in 突確 notice mode without tilting effect is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold memory number “1” and the second special figure hold memory number “0” is displayed in the start winning memory display area. When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening during the change of the production symbol in the state where the hold display is displayed in the normal mode at 5H, the “hold display” The pre-reading notice effect and the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect are determined at the same time, and the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is executed during the change of the effect design, and the change of the effect design is finished and the next The pre-reading notice effect of “mode change” is executed at the start of the change of the effect symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the game ball wins the first start winning opening during the change of the effect symbol In “Presentation”, the pre-reading notice effect and “Mode change” If you read the announcement attraction has been simultaneous determination, it may be executed during the fluctuation of the performance symbol look-ahead announcement attraction of "Hold Display" and the read-ahead announcement attraction of "mode transition" at the same time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is determined in accordance with the start winning, the next change display after the change display being executed when the start winning occurs is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading notice effect of the “mode change” is, for example, at the time of a start winning prize. The display may be started in the second or third variation display after the end of the variation display being executed in step (b). As described above, in the case of executing the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect in the second or third time change display after the end of the change display executed at the start winning prize, the “mode change” pre-reading notice A roaring effect (see FIGS. 42 (F) and 42 (G)) and a pre-reading advance notice mode in which the effect symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a loss in a plurality of variation displays until the start winning variation display in which the effect is determined. And a roaring effect (see FIG. 41 (G)) is executed, and a roaring effect in which the symbol indicating the shift to the pre-reading notice mode is stopped is executed. It is only necessary to repeat the roaring effect that is stopped and displayed in a combination in which the effect symbol is lost in the meantime. Further, in this case, the number of times that the roaring effect in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination in which the effect symbol is lost is executed until the roaring effect in which the symbol indicating the transition to the pre-reading notice mode is stopped is executed. Accordingly, the degree of expectation of “big hit” may be different in the variation display of the start winning prize in which the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the hold display corresponding to the first special figure hold memory number “1” and the second special figure hold memory number “0” is displayed in the start winning memory display area. When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening during the change of the production symbol in the state where the hold display is displayed in the normal mode at 5H, the “hold display” The pre-reading notice effect and the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect are determined at the same time, and the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is executed during the change of the effect design, and the change of the effect design is finished and the next The pre-reading notice effect of “mode change” is executed at the start of the change of the effect symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the game ball wins the first start winning opening during the change of the effect symbol In “Presentation”, the pre-reading notice effect and “Mode change” When the reading advance notice effect is determined at the same time, the hold display of the hold memory of the first start prize is displayed in the normal manner in the start prize memory display area 5H, and “hold display” is displayed at the start of the next variable display. The prefetching notice effect of “” and the prefetching notice effect of “mode shift” may be executed simultaneously.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a description will be given of an effect mode when the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” in the variable display to be notified by the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift”.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the pre-reading notice effect in the sudden warning mode including the effect operation for displaying the effect image showing the dragonfly character MC1 and the effect image showing the frog character MC2 is started (FIG. 44A). 41 (H) and FIG. 43 (E)) and 44B, as shown in FIG. 44B, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” corresponds to the fact that the first special figure holding storage number is “1”. A new change display subject to notice is started. At this time, according to the effect execution setting by the process of step S737 shown in FIG. 38, for example, as shown in FIG. 44C, an effect image is displayed in which the frog character MC2 eats the dragonfly character MC1. Thereby, it is suggested that the player can recognize that the variation display result may be “big hit” and the big hit type may be “accurate”. Thereafter, for example, a design symbol that is predetermined as a short-term opening chance as shown in FIG. 44D is derived. In this way, based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, a notification that the hit is achievable is made by displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. In addition, the notification to the effect of the suddenness is not performed, and an arbitrary effect may be executed. Then, when the round game is executed in a certainty, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened for a short period of time.

  Next, in the variable display executed by interrupting the occurrence of the second start winning after the “mode shift” pre-reading notice effect is started, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The effect aspect in the case will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the pre-reading notice effect in the sudden warning mode including the effect operation that displays the effect image showing the dragonfly character MC1 and the effect image showing the frog character MC2 is started. (Refer to FIG. 41 (H) and FIG. 43 (E)), as shown in FIG. 45 (B), three game balls pass (enter) through the opened second start winning opening, The second start prize is generated three times in succession. As a result, the second special figure reserved memory number becomes “3”, and the reserved memory display in the start winning memory display area 5H is updated as shown in FIG. 45C, for example. Further, based on the determination that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed by the process of step S803 shown in FIG. 29, the process shown in FIG. 31 is executed as the second start winning interruption determination process of step S804. The Here, since the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect is “1” and the second special figure holding memory number is “3”, the process of step S606 is executed and the second start winning interrupt flag is turned on. Set to Further, in the process of step S607, in the sudden warning mode, the variation category by the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 becomes “big hit”, and it is determined that the mode change condition is satisfied.

  At this time, by performing control for executing the winning mode change notification in the process of step S609 shown in FIG. 31, for example, an effect image showing the window WN1 as shown in FIG. Displayed on the screen. Thereby, when the second start winning is generated, the player is notified in advance that the effect mode in the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is changed. After that, for example, an effect design as shown in FIG. 45D is derived, and the effect variation display ends.

  Subsequently, since the second special figure holding storage number is “3”, a special figure game using the second special figure is executed, and a new variable display corresponding to this is started. At this time, the processing of steps S728 to S730 is executed based on the determination that the second start winning interruption flag is turned on by the processing of step S721 shown in FIG. Here, in the variable display based on the third second start prize, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. In this case, the pre-reading notice count value is held by the process of step S729, and the total number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect is changed to “4”. In this way, the setting may be changed so that the prefetching notice effect of the first time shown in FIGS. 45A and 45C is executed in total, including the prefetching notice effect of four times.

  Further, based on the fact that the mode change flag is determined to be ON by the process of step S732 shown in FIG. 38, the process of step S734 is executed, and the second special figure holding storage number is “3” or more. It is determined whether or not. Here, since the number of the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 corresponding to the start of the current variable display is “2”, the process is changed to the common notice A mode by the process of step S735. Settings are made. Thereby, for example, the pre-reading notice effect in the common notice A mode including the effect operation for displaying the effect image as shown in FIG. 45 (E) is started. Thereafter, for example, an effect symbol as shown in FIG. 45 (F) is derived, and the effect symbol variation display ends.

  Subsequently, since the second special figure holding storage number is “2”, a new variable display is started, and a common notice A mode including an effect operation for displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. After executing the pre-reading notice effect in FIG. 46, for example, an effect symbol as shown in FIG. 46B is derived, and the variation display of the effect symbol ends. In this case, in response to the second special figure hold storage number being “1”, a new variable display to be notified by the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is started. At this time, in accordance with the effect execution setting by the process of step S737 shown in FIG. 38, for example, the pre-reading notice effect including the effect operation for displaying the effect image as shown in FIGS. 46 (C) and (D) is executed. The Thereafter, for example, a jackpot combination effect design as shown in FIG. 46 (E) is derived. Thus, based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, the round game in the normal open big hit state is executed.

  In this way, after the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” is started, when the changing display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is interrupted and executed before the changing display to be notified is started, When the predetermined mode change condition is satisfied, the common notice mode is changed from the look-ahead notice mode, which suggests that there is a possibility of being controlled to a specific big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state) such as the sudden hit notice mode. It is possible to change to a pre-reading notice mode that suggests that there is a possibility of being controlled to one of a plurality of jackpot gaming states.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, a pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” which is the sudden notice mode is started, the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” and short-term open big hit After suggesting that there is a possibility of being controlled by the state, the short-term open big hit state and the normal release when the mode change condition based on the execution of the variable display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is established Change to the common notice mode, which suggests that it may be controlled to one of the big hit states. That is, the jackpot gaming state suggested by the common notice mode includes a normal opening jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-term opening jackpot state. In this way, the change from the sudden warning mode to the common warning mode suggests that there is a possibility that it will be controlled not only in the short-term open big hit state but also in the normal open big hit state. The expectation controlled by the gaming state can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” that becomes the 15R notice mode is started, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, and is controlled to the normally open big hit state. Even after suggesting that there is a possibility, if it is determined in step S607 shown in FIG. 31 that the mode change condition is satisfied, the mode is changed to the common notice mode, and the short-term open big hit state and the normal open big hit state are changed. It can be suggested that there is a possibility of being controlled by either.

  In the present embodiment, the sudden prediction mode is executed as the pre-reading notice mode, and an effect pattern that is predetermined as a short-term opening chance in the change display of the notice target by the pre-reading notice effect of the “mode shift” in the sudden prediction mode. In the present invention, the 15R notice mode or the common notice is used as the prefetch notice mode depending on the change category of the notice subject due to the prefetch notice effect of the “mode shift”. A mode may be executed. In particular, when the common advance notice mode is executed as the prefetch advance notice mode, as shown in FIG. 33, since the mode change condition when the prefetch advance notice mode being executed is the common advance notice mode is not set, FIG. As shown in B), the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening which has been opened, and the change display by the second start win interrupts the change display of the notice target stored as the first reserved memory. Even if it is executed in the above, the mode is not changed regardless of the variation category of the reserved memory stored as the second reserved memory by the second start winning opening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, based on the fact that the second start winning is generated three times in succession during the display of variation of the effect symbol in the rush prediction mode and the mode change condition is satisfied. Although the example in which the pre-reading notice mode is changed from the sudden notice mode to the common notice mode at the start of the next variable display has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch notice mode is changed from the sudden notice mode to the common notice mode. The timing may be during a variable display in which the second start winning is generated and the mode change condition is satisfied, and when the second starting winning is continuously generated a plurality of times as in the present embodiment. It may be executed at the start of any of the fluctuation display of the hold memory of the second start winning that has been generated a plurality of times.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the pre-reading notice effect is executed even when the current gaming state is in the time-shorted control with the time-shortened control (high base state) is illustrated. ), When the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the pre-reading notice effect based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize is given, there is a possibility that the variable display can be continuously executed many times in a state where the hold data or the like in which the variable display result is “big hit” is held. Therefore, in the high base state, only the pre-reading notice effect based on the occurrence of the second start winning due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the second starting winning opening is executed, and the first starting winning opening is played by the game ball. Passes ( The pre-reading notice effect based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the occurrence of the first start winning may be limited to be executed, and further, until the variable display by the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is executed. As the number of times changes, the production control becomes complicated in order to prevent the pre-reading notice effect from becoming an inappropriate notice, so that the production control becomes complicated and the pre-reading notice effect is inappropriate. In order to prevent this, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be limited in the case of time-shortening control (high base state).

  In the process of step S244 shown in FIG. 21, for example, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types at a determination rate as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the variation special chart based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening corresponds to the fluctuation display of “second special chart”, and the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start prize opening. As a result, the jackpot type is determined to be “probable change” at a higher rate than the fluctuation display of the “first chart”, thereby controlling the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage for the player. . With such a determination ratio setting, the prefetching notice mode is often determined to be the sudden notice mode in the “mode shift” prefetching notice effect in which the change display of the fluctuation special figure is “first special figure”. On the other hand, when the mode change condition is subsequently established due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the fluctuation special chart is controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage for the player corresponding to the fluctuation display of the “second special figure”. Is more likely. Thus, the frequency of changing from the sudden warning mode to the common warning mode is higher than the frequency of changing from the 15R warning mode to the common warning mode. Thereby, when the pre-reading notice mode is changed, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation that is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is highly advantageous for the player.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display”, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” in which the turn effect can be executed is limited. Pre-reading of “mode transition” for hold memory for which there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained in the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” by performing the roaring effect during execution of the pre-reading notice effect The effect of the pre-order notice effect of the “mode change” is significantly reduced by the player being informed in advance that the pre-order notice effect of the “mode change” is started before the notice effect is executed. Therefore, as described in the cited reference, the excitement of the gaming machine may be reduced by performing the roaring effect during the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display”. The can be prevented, it is possible to improve the interest.

  Further, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift”.

  In addition, since the pre-reading notice effect of the “mode shift” is executed even during the execution of the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect, the “mode” The interest of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved as compared with the case where the pre-reading notice effect itself of “Migration” is not executed.

  In addition, during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift”, when the variation display of the second special figure in which the variable display is prioritized is executed, the winning random number determination process for the variation display of the second special figure is performed. If the determination result is that it is controlled to a specific gaming state different from the type of advance notice of the “mode change” prefetching notice effect being executed, the prefetching notice effect of the “mode change” being executed Will be canceled and a special notice will be executed, so that the consistency of the notice contents can be maintained and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  As a specific example, in the first embodiment, not only after starting the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” that becomes the sudden prediction mode, but also after starting the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change” that becomes the 15R notice mode. Also, the description has been made assuming that the mode is changed to the common notice mode based on the fact that the mode change condition as shown in FIG. 33 is established. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to change to the common notice mode based on the establishment of the mode change condition in the sudden notice mode, while the mode change condition is established in the 15R notice mode. However, the change to the common notice mode may not be performed. In this case, when the variable display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is interrupted and executed in the 15R notice mode, the pre-reading notice effect of the “mode shift” that becomes the 15R notice mode is canceled and the normal effect mode is restored. You may do it. At this time, it is possible to return to the normal effect mode after executing a predetermined effect informing that the normal open big hit state is not controlled in the 15R notice mode. In this way, it is suggested that it is possible to control to the big hit gaming state having a high degree of advantage for the player by making it possible to change to the common notice mode based on the establishment of the mode change condition only in the rush notice mode. After that, it is possible to prevent a decrease in expectation (so-called “decline”) due to execution of a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled even in a big hit gaming state having a low advantage for the player. Interest can be improved.

  As the pre-reading notice mode, the sudden notice mode and the common notice mode may be provided, but the 15R notice mode may not be provided. Also in this case, it is only necessary to be able to change to the common notice mode based on the fact that the mode change condition has been established in the sudden notice mode.

  In the first embodiment, when the pre-reading notice mode is the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode, based on the occurrence of the second start winning, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state suggested by the pre-reading notice mode is not controlled. In this case, the mode change condition is satisfied and the mode is changed to the common notice mode, including the case where the change display result is “lost”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state suggested by the prefetching advance notice mode. Only when it is determined that the mode change condition is satisfied, the mode may be changed to the common notice mode. That is, in the process of step S607 shown in FIG. 31, when the pre-reading advance notice mode is the sudden advance notice mode, it is determined that the mode change condition has been established with the variation category at the time of starting winning corresponding to only “big hit”. Further, in this process, when the pre-reading advance notice mode is the 15R advance notice mode, it is determined that the mode change condition is satisfied only corresponding to the variation category at the time of the start winning prize being “accuracy”. In this case, a look-ahead notice mode (abrupt notice) suggesting that there is a possibility of being controlled to a specific big hit gaming state (a part of multiple types of big hit gaming states) such as a short-term open big hit state or a normal open big hit state Mode or 15R notice mode), the change display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning, and when the common notice mode is changed, the pre-read notice mode before the change is It is determined that the game is controlled to another jackpot gaming state (short-term open jackpot state or normal open jackpot state) that has not been suggested. In this way, it is possible to improve the excitement of the game by enhancing the joy of the player and the unexpectedness of the game and production by changing the pre-reading notice mode.

  Alternatively, even when it is determined that when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning, it is determined that the same jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot gaming state suggested by the pre-reading notice mode, the predetermined ratio The mode change condition may be satisfied and the common notice mode may be changed. For example, in the process of step S607 shown in FIG. 31, when the pre-reading notice mode is the sudden notice mode, the mode change condition is established at a rate of 10/100 corresponding to the variation category at the time of starting winning a prize. It is determined that Further, in this process, when the pre-reading notice mode is the 15R notice mode, it is determined that the mode change condition is established at a rate of 10/100 corresponding to the variation category at the time of the start winning prize corresponding to “big hit”. In this case, when the pre-reading advance notice mode (the sudden advance notice mode or the 15R notice mode) suggesting that there is a possibility of being controlled to a specific big hit game state such as a short-term open big hit state or a normal open big hit state, Corresponding to the fact that the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning, even when the mode is changed to the common notice mode, the specific jackpot gaming state (short term) suggested in the prefetch notice mode before the change is made. (Open big hit state or normal open big hit state). In this way, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by enhancing the unexpectedness of the game and production by changing the prefetch notice mode.

  In this way, when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the determination as to whether or not to change the pre-reading notice mode is made at a different rate depending on the jackpot type. Also good. That is, when a specific big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state or normal open big hit state) is suggested corresponding to the pre-reading notice mode such as the sudden prediction mode or the 15R notice mode, the variation category at the time of starting winning is pre-reading notice. When the jackpot gaming state is different from the specific jackpot gaming state suggested by the mode, the consistency of the production contents is maintained by always changing to the common notice mode (at a decision rate of 100/100). On the other hand, if the variation category at the time of starting winning is the same jackpot gaming state as the specific jackpot gaming state suggested in the look-ahead notice mode, it may be changed to the common notice mode or changed to the common notice mode. By setting so that it may not be performed, the unexpectedness of the game and production by changing the look-ahead notice mode can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Alternatively, the determination as to whether or not to change the pre-reading notice mode when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize is performed at a different rate depending on the jackpot type as described above. Alternatively, it may be performed at a different rate according to the number of second start winnings that occurred during the variable display that is being executed based on the occurrence of the first starting winning.

  Alternatively, when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start prize, the fluctuation display result based on the occurrence of the second start prize (determination result as to whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state) Regardless of this, the consistency of the production contents may be maintained by always changing to the common notice mode (at a decision rate of 100/100).

  Or, when the variable display is executed by interruption based on the occurrence of the second start winning, even if it is determined that the variable display result in the variable display is “losing”, is the mode change condition satisfied at a predetermined rate? You may decide whether or not. For example, in the process of step S607 shown in FIG. 31, when the pre-reading notice mode is the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode, the variation category at the time of starting winning a prize corresponds to “non-reach” or “super reach”. It is determined that the mode change condition is satisfied at a rate of / 100. Alternatively, it is determined that the mode change condition is satisfied at a rate of 5/100 corresponding to the non-reach notification content at the start winning prize, while the variable category at the start winning prize corresponds to “super reach”. It may be determined that the mode change condition is established at a ratio of 50/100. In this way, for example, in the case of “super reach” in which the reach effect of super reach is executed, the mode change condition is established at a higher rate than in the case of “non-reach”, and the change of the pre-reading notice mode is performed. It may be done. In this case, a specific display mode such that the change display mode of the effect symbol becomes the reach mode and the reach effect of the super reach is executed by changing from the sudden prediction mode or the 15R notification mode to the common notification mode. Can increase the sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game. When it is determined that the variation display result is “losing”, and it is determined that the mode change condition is not satisfied, the variation display that is executed by interruption is executed in the same manner as the process of step S729 shown in FIG. 38 in the above embodiment. The number of times may be added to the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” may be canceled and returned to the normal effect mode.

  Therefore, as a determination result that is different from the determination result that it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state suggested by the prefetching notice effect that has been started, at least the jackpot gaming state suggested by the prefetching notice effect is The determination result indicating that the game is controlled to a different jackpot gaming state may be included, and the determination result indicating that the game is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state may or may not be included. .

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading notice mode is either the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode, if the second start prize is generated, the variable category of the reserved memory by the second start prize is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetching notice mode is either the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode. When the second start winning is generated, in the hold memory by the second start winning, the “special symbol”, “hold display”, “mode shift”, “hold display + mode shift” in step S809 of the pre-reading notice process. When the execution of any of the pre-reading notice effects is determined, the pre-reading notice mode may be changed.

  The pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a specific jackpot gaming state such as a normal open big hit state or a short-term open big hit state is not limited to the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” such as the 15R notice mode or the sudden notice mode. For example, a pre-reading notice effect of “character display” by displaying an effect image indicating a predetermined character on the screen of the effect display device 5, a pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of times Any pre-reading notice effect that can be executed before the start of the variable display to be notified is started, such as a pre-reading notice effect of a “story effect” in which a predetermined story progresses over the variable display. Further, instead of the pre-reading notice effect by displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, or together with the pre-reading notice effect by displaying the effect image, sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R, game effect The pre-reading notice effect is performed by any lighting device including the lighting operation of the lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the operation of the movable member provided inside or outside the game area, or a combination of some or all of them. Also good. The pre-reading notice effect that informs that there is a possibility of becoming one of a plurality of types of big hit game states such as a normal open big hit state or a short-term open big hit state is not limited to the pre-reading notice effect of the `` mode transition '' such as the common notice mode, Any pre-reading notice effect that can be executed prior to the start of the variable display to be noticed may be used.

  In the first embodiment, in the process of step S244 shown in FIG. 21, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types at the determination rate as shown in FIG. In response to the fluctuation display of “”, the bonus chart is determined to be “probable variation” at a higher rate than the fluctuation display of “first chart”, and the jackpot gaming state has a high advantage for the player. It was described as being controlled. Further, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8, in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation special chart “second special figure”, the ratio at which the big hit type is determined to be “probable change” is determined such that the big hit type is other than “probable change”. While the ratio is higher than the ratio, the ratio that the big hit type is determined to be “probable change” is lower than the ratio that the big hit type is determined to be other than “probable change” in the fluctuation display with the fluctuation special chart “first special figure” Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least in the fluctuation display with the fluctuation special chart “second special figure”, the fluctuation special figure is more advantageous than the fluctuation display of the “first special figure”. What is necessary is just to be controlled to the big hit game state. That is, in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation special chart “second special figure”, the ratio determined to the predetermined jackpot gaming state having a high advantage for the player, such as the ratio determined to the jackpot type “probable variation”, It may be lower than the ratio determined other than the predetermined jackpot gaming state. Alternatively, in the fluctuation display of the fluctuation special chart “first special figure”, the ratio determined to be a predetermined jackpot gaming state having a high advantage for the player, such as a ratio determined to the jackpot type “probability variation” It may be higher than the ratio determined other than the predetermined big hit gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, in the process of step S723 shown in FIG. 38, when the “variation category” shown in FIG. It has been described that the common notice mode is determined at a different rate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the “variation category”, it may be determined whether or not the common advance notice mode is set at a different rate depending on the second special figure reservation storage number. That is, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to set the common notice mode at a different rate depending on a part or all of the “variation category” and the second special figure reservation storage number.

  In addition, a pre-reading advance notice of “mode change” that shifts to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes such as the device configuration and data structure of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sudden advance notice mode, the 15R advance notice mode, and the common advance notice mode. Various display operations including an image display operation in an effect display device for executing an effect, a pre-reading notice effect other than “mode change”, an audio output operation in a speaker, and a lighting operation in a game effect lamp or decoration LED, etc. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  Further, in the present embodiment, by restricting the execution of the “mode change” prefetching notice effect during the execution of the “hold display” prefetching notice effect as the first notice, the “mode change” prefetching notice effect. Although the example which prevents the interest of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being reduced without executing the roaring effect that is a part of the game has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, as a first notice Until the light emission effect by the lamp 9 and the voice notification effect by the speakers 8L and 8R are set to be executed, and the change display of the hold memory where the execution of the light emission effect and the voice notification effect is determined starts. You may make it restrict | limit execution of the prefetch notice effect of "mode change."

  Further, in the present embodiment, when execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is determined or when the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is being executed, a part of the second notice Although an example of restricting the execution of the hit effect by prohibiting the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” with a certain hit effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “Display” is determined, or if the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” is being executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect itself of “Transition” is prohibited. In addition to restricting the execution of the production, by setting the ratio of executing the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” lower than the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “hold display” in the present embodiment, It is also possible to limit the execution.

  In the embodiment, the process shifts from the variable display start waiting process to the variable display start setting process in response to reception of the first change start command or the second change start command. However, the present invention is limited to this. For example, instead of the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the process proceeds to the variation display start setting process on condition that both the previous variation pattern designation command and the subsequent variation pattern designation command are received. By reducing the number of commands, even if only one of the previous variation pattern designation command or the subsequent variation pattern designation command is received, the variation display start variation processing is not performed. The display may not be executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the same front variation pattern designation command and rear variation pattern designation command are transmitted in the case of the big hit and the case of the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, by sending different front variation pattern designation command and rear variation pattern designation command depending on whether it is a big hit or not, whether or not it will be a big hit from the previous variation pattern designation command or the rear variation pattern designation command The production control CPU 120 may be specified.

  In addition, when transmitting the category of the specific effect specified by the previous variation pattern designation command, the combination of the category of the specific effect and the category of the reach effect may be transmitted with one command, or the specific effect And the category of reach production may be transmitted by individual commands.

  In addition, when transmitting a category of a specific effect specified by the previous variation pattern designation command, each process for transmitting a category based on the previous variation pattern designation command and a category based on the subsequent variation pattern designation command Each process for transmission may be modularized, and the same processing module may be used for common processing parts, thereby reducing the capacity of the entire program.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the post-change pattern is determined first is illustrated, but the pre-change pattern may be determined first.

  Moreover, after determining the post-variation pattern, an example has been illustrated in which only the pre-variation pattern associated with the determined post-variation pattern can be determined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-variation pattern The pattern and the post-change pattern may be selected completely independently.

  Moreover, in the said Example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12, the total number of reserved memories irrespective of the number of reserved memories corresponding to the special symbol type (first special figure, second special figure) to be variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of special symbol to be variably displayed is determined. The post-variation pattern or the pre-variation pattern may be determined according to the number of reserved memories corresponding to (first special figure, second special figure).

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning random number determination process executed at the time of starting winning and the variation pattern setting process executed at the start of variation are illustrated as separate processes, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Rather, the processes in the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process are modularized, and the same processing module is used for common processing parts, so that the capacity of the entire program is reduced. Anyway.

  In the above-described embodiment, the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H is executed by the “♦” display which is a special mode different from the normal time, as the pre-reading notice effect pattern of “hold display”. However, the special mode of the pre-reading notice effect pattern of “hold display” may be provided in a plurality of patterns by combinations of shapes and colors different from the “●” display that is the normal mode. In this case, by providing a strength relationship between the special modes of the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect pattern, according to the special modes of the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect pattern displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. The degree of restriction of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” may be varied. Specifically, “☆” display (weak display) and “★” display (strong display) are provided as special aspects of the pre-reading notice effect pattern of “hold display”, and “☆” is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. Is displayed, the execution of the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect is determined at a lower rate than when the “hold display” pre-reading notice effect is not executed, and “★” is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. When the display is displayed, execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” may be prohibited.

  Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same structure as the said Example and the overlapping structure are abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S804 of FIG. 29 as the second start winning interrupt determination process. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S601 to S606 and S610 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted. The processes in steps S6070 and S6080 executed instead of steps S607 to S609 will be described. To do.

  After execution of the process in step S606, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined special effect condition is satisfied (step S6070). The special effect condition is a condition for executing an effect predetermined as the special effect. In this embodiment, a sudden warning mode and a 15R warning mode are prepared in advance as a plurality of types of pre-reading warning modes that are transition modes that can be shifted by executing a “mode shift” pre-reading warning effect. . The sudden warning mode may be controlled to a short-term open big hit state in which a short open round is executed when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” in the variable display subject to notice. It is a production mode that suggests that. The 15R notice mode is controlled to the normally open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. It is a production mode that suggests that there is a possibility of being. Note that it is possible to suggest that the rush prediction mode may be controlled not only in the short-term open big hit state but also in the small hit gaming state when the variation display result is “small hit”.

  FIG. 48 shows an example of setting special effect conditions. In the setting example shown in FIG. 48, when the pre-reading notice mode is either the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode, the special effect condition is established corresponding to the fact that the variation category at the time of starting winning is predetermined content. . The variation category here is a variation category indicated by the second start opening winning designation command included in the new received command, and is stored in association with the new hold display number in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. . When the pre-reading notice mode is the sudden notice mode, the special effect condition is satisfied if the variation category at the time of starting winning is “big hit”. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice mode is the 15R notice mode, the special performance condition is satisfied if the variation category at the time of starting winning is either “surprise” or “small hit”.

  In this way, in the sudden warning mode that suggests that there is a possibility of a short-term open big hit state or a small hit game state, the variation category at the time of the start winning based on the occurrence of the second start winning is the sudden warning mode. The special performance execution condition is established when the game is a “hit” corresponding to a big hit game state different from the suggested short-term open big hit state. When the 15R notice mode suggests that there is a possibility of a normal open big hit state, the variation category at the time of the start winning based on the second start prize is the normal open big hit state suggested by the 15R notice mode. The special performance condition is established when the game is “probable” corresponding to different big hit game states. A special effect is executed based on the establishment of the special effect condition. As a result, in the pre-reading notice mode corresponding to the fact that the change display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is interrupted and executed after the transition to the predetermined pre-reading notice mode in the “mode change” pre-reading notice effect. The player is informed in a recognizable manner that the game state is controlled to a big hit game state different from the specific big hit game state.

  When the special effect condition is not satisfied in step S6070 shown in FIG. 47 (step S6070; No), the second start winning interruption determination process is terminated, and when the special effect condition is satisfied (step S6070; Yes), for example, After setting the special effect flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 to the ON state (step S6080), the second start winning interruption determination process is terminated.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S707 of FIG. 37 as the mode transition notice setting process. In the present embodiment, the processes in step S721, step S728 to step S731, and step S737 to step S740 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. Steps S7230 and S732 are executed instead of step S723. Processing in steps S7320 to 7330 executed instead of step S736 will be described. When the second start winning interrupt flag is off (step S721; No), the effect control CPU 120 is at the time of the mode transition notice start corresponding to the variable display for starting the execution of the prefetch notice effect of “mode change”. It is determined whether or not (step S722).

  If it is determined in step S722 that the mode transition notice starts (step S722; Yes), the effect mode to be executed by executing the “mode change” prefetch notice effect is changed to a plurality of types of prefetch notice modes. Either one is determined (step S7230). As an example, in the process of step S7230, a pre-read preview mode determination table prepared in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the pre-read preview mode. In the prefetching advance notice mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value for determining the prefetching advance notice mode may be assigned to a plurality of types of prefetch advance notice modes such as the sudden notice advance mode or the 15R notice mode. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the prefetching notice mode determination table based on numerical data indicating random number values for prefetching notice mode determination extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit. What is necessary is just to determine the prefetch notice mode used as the production mode of a transfer destination.

  FIG. 50A shows an example of the prefetching notice mode determination ratio. In this example of the prefetching notice mode determination ratio, the pre-reading notice mode determination ratio is transmitted in response to the change display to be noticed by the prefetch notice effect of “mode shift”. Depending on the notification contents (specified contents of the determination result at the time of winning) according to the start opening prize specifying command (the first starting opening prize specifying command or the second starting opening prize specifying command), the rate at which the pre-reading notice mode is determined is changed. Yes. The notification content (variation category) corresponding to the variation display to be notified may be specified from the stored content of the command in the start winning reception command buffer 194A.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 50A, when the “variation category” is “big hit”, the 15R notification mode is always determined (the determination ratio is 100/100), but not the sudden prediction mode. (The determination ratio is 0/100). In addition, when the “variation category” is “surprise”, it is always determined to be the sudden warning mode, but is limited so that it is not determined to the 15R warning mode. Even when the “variation category” is “small hit”, the sudden warning mode is always determined, but the 15R warning mode is limited. When the “variation category” is “other than the above (losing)”, it is determined at a predetermined rate as either the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode.

  In such a setting, when the mode is shifted to the 15R advance notice mode, the change display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” in the variable display to be notified in the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change”. On the other hand, there is no possibility that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In addition, when shifting to the sudden warning mode, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” and the big hit type will be “surprise” or the fluctuation display result may be “small hit” in the fluctuation display subject to notice. On the other hand, there is no possibility that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”.

  As described above, when the production mode is shifted to the 15R notice mode due to the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change”, the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, so that normally open big hit It can be suggested that the state may be controlled. On the other hand, when shifting to the 15R notice mode, it is not suggested that there is a possibility of being controlled to the short-term open big hit state by the fluctuation display result being “big hit” and the big hit type being “surprise”. Further, when the mode is shifted to the sudden warning mode, it can be suggested that there is a possibility of being controlled in the short-term open big hit state, but there is no suggestion that there is a possibility of being controlled in the normal open big hit state.

  The pre-reading notice effect that shifts to the 15R notice mode is one of two big hit types, that is, when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. Suggest a possibility. Thus, the pre-reading notice effect that is a specific suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of becoming a part of the big hit game state included in the multiple types of big hit game states suggests the possibility of being one of two or more big hit types You may do. In addition to the possibility that the fluctuation display result will be “big hit” and the big hit type will be “surprise”, the prefetching notice effect that shifts to the sudden warning mode also suggests that the fluctuation display result may be “small hit” . In this way, the pre-reading notice effect that is a specific suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of becoming a part of the big hit gaming state included in the multiple types of big hit gaming states is not only the possibility of becoming the big hit gaming state, but also the big hit gaming state It may indicate the possibility of a special game state such as a small hit game state different from the above. Note that the pre-reading notice effect as the specific suggestion effect may only indicate the possibility of becoming a single jackpot type included in a plurality of jackpot types.

  If it is determined in step S731 that it is not the mode transition notice start time (step S731; No), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag is on (step S7320). The special effect flag is set to the ON state by the process of step S6080 shown in FIG. 47 based on the fact that a predetermined special effect condition is satisfied when the second start winning is generated.

  If it is determined in step S7320 that the special effect flag is on (step S7320; Yes), it is determined whether or not the current variable display is a variable display that is subject to the advance notice by the pre-read notice effect (step S7320). S7321). For example, in the process of step S7321, when the prefetch notice count value matches the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect, it may be determined that the display is a variable display to be noticed.

  When it is determined in step S722 that it is not the mode transition notice start time (step S722; No), when the process of step S7230 is executed, or when it is determined in step S7320 that the special effect flag is off ( In step S7320; No), when it is determined in step S7321 that the display is not the subject of change notification (step S7321; No), the change display in which the special effect is not executed is started. At this time, a setting for executing a predetermined effect is performed in accordance with each prefetch notice mode (step S737).

  If it is determined in step S7321 that the display subject is a variable display (step S7321; Yes), settings for executing a special effect are performed (step S7322). In the process of step S7322, for example, one of a plurality of special effect patterns prepared in advance may be determined as the usage pattern depending on whether the current prefetching notice mode is the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode. . FIG. 50B shows an example of determining the special effect pattern by the process of step S7322. In this embodiment, a special effect pattern TPA and a special effect pattern TPB are prepared in advance as a plurality of special effect patterns. In the determination example shown in FIG. 50B, one of the plurality of special effect patterns TPA and TPB is determined as the usage pattern in accordance with the variable display contents in the current variable display. The CPU 120 for effect control, for example, as “variation display content according to the combination of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variation display result indicated by the variation display result notification command” If you specify whether it is "non-reach (losing)", "normal reach (losing)", "super reach (losing)", "non-probability / probability (big hit)", "surprise (big hit) / small hit" Good.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (B), when the variation display content is “non-probability change / probability change (big hit)”, the special effect pattern TPA is determined to be the use pattern in response to the normal open big hit state being controlled. Is done. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “surprise (big hit) / small hit”, the special effect pattern TPB is determined as the usage pattern in response to being controlled to the short-term open big hit state or the small hit gaming state. In the special effect by the special effect pattern TPA, after notifying the effect result corresponding to the case where the short-term open big hit state is not controlled in the sudden prediction mode, the effect result indicating that the normal open big hit state is controlled is notified. On the other hand, in the special effect by the special effect pattern TPB, after notifying the effect result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled to the normally open big hit state in the 15R notice mode, the effect result indicating that it is controlled to the short open big hit state or the small hit game state Is notified. After executing the process of step S7322 shown in FIG. 49 in this way, the special effect flag is cleared and turned off (step S7330), and the process proceeds to step S739.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of FIG. 28 as the variable display effect process. In this embodiment, steps S551 to S553 ', steps S556 to S558, and steps S559 to S564 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and a description thereof is omitted.

  After execution of the process of step S553 or step S553 ', the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a hit notification effect execution period for executing the hit notification effect (step S5540). The winning notification effect includes a part or all of the special effect, and is an effect that the player can recognize in a recognizable manner that the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state different from the specific big hit gaming state suggested in the pre-reading notice mode. is there. The hit notification effect execution period is determined in advance in the effect control pattern selected by the processing of steps S531a and 531b shown in FIG. 36 corresponding to the determination result of the special effect pattern by the processing of step S7322 shown in FIG. Just do it. When it is determined in step S5540 that it is the hit notification effect execution period (step S5540; Yes), effect operation control for executing the hit notification effect is performed (step S5550).

  FIG. 52 shows an execution example of the special effect during the variation display of the effect symbol. When the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is executed, the process shifts to a pre-reading notice mode different from the normal effect mode (normal effect mode) before the start of the variable display to be noticed. After that, when the variable display to be notified is started based on the establishment of the special effect condition, the pre-read notification effect execution period Ti11 that continues from the previous variable display is entered. At this time, based on the special effect pattern determined in the process of step S7322 shown in FIG. 49, the effect result indicating that the game is not controlled to the specific jackpot gaming state suggested in the prefetching advance notice mode is notified. For example, an effect symbol such as a non-reach effect effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary to notify that “is not a“ hit ”. After the effect result is notified in this way, the hit notification effect execution period Ti12 is reached. At this time, re-variation is performed in which the variation display of the effect symbols is executed again in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Alternatively, the effect result in the pre-reading notice mode may be notified, for example, by displaying an effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5 without temporarily stopping the effect symbol. After notifying the effect result in the pre-reading notice mode in this way, for example, by displaying the effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, it is controlled to the big hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state suggested in the prefetching notice mode. What is necessary is just to alert | report an effect result. Further, it is only necessary to notify that the variation display result is “big hit” by deriving the effect symbol of the big hit combination.

  When it is determined in step S5540 shown in FIG. 51 that it is not the hit notification execution period (step S5540; No), after executing the process of step S5550, it is a reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect. It is determined whether or not (step S556).

  Next, in the variable display executed by interrupting the occurrence of the second start winning after the “mode shift” pre-reading notice effect is started, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The effect aspect in the case will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (A), when the pre-reading notice effect in the rush notice mode including the effect operation that displays the effect image showing the dragonfly character MC1 and the effect image showing the frog character MC2 is started (FIG. 53A). 41 (H) and FIG. 43 (E)), a pre-reading notice effect in the sudden notice mode is started. On the other hand, in this execution example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), one game ball passes (enters) through the opened second start winning opening, and the second start winning occurs once. . As a result, the second special figure reserved memory number becomes “1”, and the reserved memory display in the start winning memory display area 5H is updated as shown in FIG. 53 (C), for example. In addition, based on the determination that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed by the process of step S803 shown in FIG. 29, the process shown in FIG. 47 is executed as the second start winning interruption determination process of step S804. The Here, since the remaining number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect is “1” and the second special figure holding storage number is “1” (step S605; No), the process of step S606 is executed and the second start is performed. The winning interrupt flag is set to the on state. Further, in the process of step S6070, in the sudden warning mode, the notification content by the second start opening winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is “big hit”, and it is determined that the special effect condition is satisfied. Thereafter, for example, a definite effect symbol as shown in FIG. 53D is derived, and the variation display of the effect symbol ends.

  Subsequently, since the second special figure holding storage number is “1”, the special figure game using the second special figure is preferentially executed, and a new variable display corresponding to this is started. At this time, the processes of steps S728 to S730 are executed based on the determination that the second start prize winning interrupt flag is ON by the process of step S721 shown in FIG. Here, in the variable display based on one second start winning, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. In this case, the pre-reading notice count value may be held by the process of step S729, and the total number of executions of the pre-reading notice effect may be left as “2”. As described above, the setting may be changed so that the prefetching notice effect of the first time shown in FIGS. 53A and 53C is executed twice in total.

  Further, it is determined that the special effect flag is turned on by the process of step S7320 shown in FIG. Thus, settings for executing the special effects are performed. In this execution example, since the pre-reading notice mode is the sudden notice mode, the special effect pattern TPB shown in FIG. 50B is determined as the usage pattern. Based on such settings, for example, by displaying an effect image as shown in FIG. 53 (E), the possibility of being controlled to the short-term open big hit state suggested in the sudden warning mode is low, or short-term open An effect result in the sudden notice mode, such as confirmation that it is not controlled in the big hit state, is notified. In the effect image shown in FIG. 53 (E), unlike the effect image shown in FIG. 44 (C), the fact that the frog character MC2 fails to eat the dragonfly character MC1 is not controlled to the short-term open big hit state. It only needs to be notified. Thereafter, based on the setting of the effect control pattern corresponding to the special effect pattern TPB, for example, the effect symbol of the lost combination as shown in FIG. 53 (F) is temporarily displayed. Also by this, it can alert | report that it is not controlled by the short-term open big hit state suggested by the sudden notice mode.

  Even when the effect symbol as shown in FIG. 53 (F) is temporarily stopped, the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game is continuously executed. Then, on the screen of the effect display device 5, the effect symbol change display is executed again (re-change display). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), an effect image in which the character CH1 appears is displayed, and then, as shown in FIGS. 54 (B) and (C), the character CH1 represents the character MC1 that is a registration mark. A special effect is executed in which the frog character MC2 is caught and eaten by the frog character MC2. Such a special effect by displaying the effect image becomes a hit notification effect for notifying the effect result that the normal open big hit state is controlled different from the short-term open big hit state suggested in the sudden notice mode. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54D, a jackpot combination effect symbol and the like are derived. Thus, based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, the round game in the normal open big hit state is executed.

  In the hit notification effect included in the special effect, for example, a dragonfly character MC1 and a frog character MC2 shown in FIGS. May be used. Alternatively, in the hit notification effect included in the special effect, an effect element common to the effect in the pre-reading notice mode is not used, and an effect using a separate effect element may be executed. As a hit notification effect included in the special effect, after giving the player an impression that the fluctuation display result does not become “big hit”, a relief measure is taken and the fluctuation display result is “big hit” or “small”. A relief effect may be executed to notify that “winning” is achieved.

  As described above, when the change display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is interrupted and executed after the start of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is started and before the start of the change display to be notified is started. When the specified special performance condition is satisfied, the performance result indicating that it is not controlled in the specific jackpot gaming state (short-term open jackpot state) suggested in the rush prediction mode is informed, and is then suggested in the rush warning mode. A special effect for informing the effect that the game is controlled to a big hit game state (normally open big hit state) different from the big hit game state is executed.

  On the other hand, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” that becomes the 15R notice mode is started, and the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, and is controlled to the normally open big hit state. Even after suggesting that there is a possibility, if it is determined in step S6070 shown in FIG. 47 that the special performance condition has been established, the specific jackpot gaming state suggested in the 15R notice mode (normally open jackpot state) ) After notifying the effect result that it is not controlled, a special effect that informs the effect result that it is controlled to the big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state) different from the big hit gaming state suggested in the 15R notice mode Is executed. In this case, in the processing of step S7321 shown in FIG. 49, the variation display content is “probability (big hit) / small hit” corresponding to the fact that the fluctuation display content is “non-probability change / probability change (big hit)”. A special effect pattern TPA different from the above is determined as the usage pattern. Thereby, the effect result to the effect that it is controlled to the short-term open big hit state can be notified by executing the special effect in a different production mode than when the normal open big hit state is controlled.

  In the process of step S244 shown in FIG. 21, for example, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types at a determination rate as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the variation special chart based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening corresponds to the fluctuation display of “second special chart”, and the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start prize opening. As a result, the jackpot type is determined to be “probable change” at a higher rate than the fluctuation display of the “first chart”, thereby controlling the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage for the player. . With such a determination ratio setting, the prefetching notice mode is often determined to be the sudden notice mode in the “mode shift” prefetching notice effect in which the change display of the fluctuation special figure is “first special figure”. On the other hand, when the special performance condition is subsequently established due to the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the fluctuation special chart is controlled to the jackpot gaming state having a high advantage for the player corresponding to the fluctuation display of the “second special figure”. Is more likely. In this way, the frequency at which the special effect condition is established and the special effect is executed in the sudden warning mode is higher than the frequency at which the special effect condition is established and the special effect is executed in the 15R notice mode. . As a result, it is expected that special effects will be executed and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state with a high advantage for the player even when the pre-play notice mode suggests the possibility of a jackpot gaming state with a low advantage for the player. A feeling can be heightened.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the variable display of the second special figure in which the variable display is prioritized is executed during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition”, the variable display of the second special figure is performed. If the determination result of the random number determination process at the time of winning is a determination result indicating that the game is controlled to a specific gaming state different from the type to be notified of the pre-reading announcement effect of “mode change” being executed, the special effect is finally obtained. Is executed, it is possible to give the player a surprise while preventing the content of the notice from becoming inconsistent, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be provided with all the technical features shown in the second embodiment, and a part described in the second embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  As a specific example, in the second embodiment, not only after starting the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” that becomes the sudden prediction mode, but also after starting the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change” that becomes the 15R notice mode. In the above description, the special effect is executed on the basis that the special effect condition as shown in FIG. 48 is established. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special performance condition can be executed based on the establishment of the special performance condition in the sudden prediction mode, while the special performance condition is satisfied in the 15R notification mode. The special effect may not be executed. In this case, when the variable display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is interrupted and executed in the 15R notice mode, the pre-reading notice effect of the “mode shift” that becomes the 15R notice mode is canceled and the normal effect mode is restored. You may do it. At this time, it may be possible to return to the normal effect mode after notifying the effect result that the normal open big hit state is not controlled in the 15R notice mode. As described above, it is suggested that the special effect can be executed based on the establishment of the special effect condition only in the rush prediction mode, so that the player can be controlled to the big hit gaming state having a high advantage for the player. Later, the special effect is executed and the effect of the effect that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state having a low degree of advantage for the player is notified, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming interest (so-called “decline”). That is, when the special effect is executed, an effect result indicating that the jackpot game state is controlled to be more advantageous to the player than the jackpot game state suggested in the pre-read notice mode is notified. Thereby, when a special effect is performed, a player's pleasure can be heightened and the interest of a game can be improved.

  When the special effect condition is established and the special effect is executed when the pre-reading notice mode is the sudden notice mode, for example, the normal open big hit state suggested in the 15R notice mode different from the sudden notice mode is controlled. The effect result of the effect may be notified, or the effect result that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state suggested in other pre-reading notice modes such as the 15R notice mode may be notified. . As an example, in addition to the big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 15 times as in the normal open big hit state in the second embodiment, an 8R big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times is provided. Then, after the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the sudden notice mode is started, when the 8R big hit state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the sudden notice is given. After notifying the effect result in the mode, a special effect may be executed to notify the effect result indicating that it is controlled to the 8R big hit state which is not suggested in the sudden warning mode or the 15R warning mode. In this case, the 8R big hit gaming state is a big hit gaming state in which the number of round games is less than that in the normal open big hit state, and is less advantageous to the player than the normal open big hit state. On the other hand, the 8R jackpot gaming state may be a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-term opening jackpot state because the number of round games executed is larger than the short-term opening jackpot state. In this case, by executing the special effect, it is possible to notify the effect result indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state having a high advantage for the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game entertainment from being reduced.

  As the pre-reading notice mode, only the sudden notice mode may be provided, and the 15R notice mode may not be provided. In this case as well, a special effect that informs the effect of the normal open big hit state after notifying the effect result in the predictive alert mode based on the fact that the special effect condition has been established when in the predictive alert mode. It is only necessary that the production is executed. Alternatively, as the pre-reading advance notice mode, in addition to the sudden advance notice mode and the 15R advance notice mode, a common notice suggesting that the game is controlled to one of a plurality of types of big hit game states including a normal open big hit state and a short-term open big hit state. A mode may be provided. In this case, when the prefetch notice mode is the common notice mode, the special effect condition may not be established and the special effect may not be executed. That is, when a pre-reading advance notice effect is executed that suggests the possibility of becoming a part of the big hit game state among a plurality of types of big hit game states, the special effect is established by the establishment of the special effect condition based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize. When a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to one of a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states is executed, the special effect condition based on the second start prize is not satisfied The special effect may not be executed.

  When a common advance notice mode is suggested to suggest that the game is controlled to one of a plurality of types of big hit game states including a normal open big hit state and a short-term open big hit state, Whether or not the pre-reading notice mode is set to the common notice mode may be determined at a different rate according to the second special figure reservation storage number. As the common notice mode, a plurality of types of common notice modes having different presentation modes are provided, and when the pre-read notice notice effect of “mode shift” is started, the mode shifts to a different common notice mode according to the number of second special figure hold storage. You may let them. Alternatively, it may be determined which of the plurality of types of common notice modes is set as the prefetch notice mode at a different rate depending on the second special figure reservation storage number.

  In the second embodiment, when the pre-reading advance notice mode is the sudden advance notice mode or the 15R advance notice mode, based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the big hit game state different from the big hit game state suggested by the pre-read advance notice mode or Only when it is determined that the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the special effect is established and the special effect is executed. Therefore, a look-ahead advance notice mode (abrupt advance notice mode or 15R) suggesting that there is a possibility of being controlled to a specific big hit game state (a part of a plurality of types of big hit game states) such as a short-term open big hit state or a normal open big hit state When the special effect is executed in response to the fact that the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize in the advance notice mode, the other jackpots not suggested in the look-ahead advance notice mode are performed. It is determined that the game state (short-term open big hit state or normal open big hit state) or the small hit game state is controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning, it is determined that it is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state suggested by the pre-reading notice mode. For example, the special effect may be established and the special effect may be executed including the case where the change display result is “lost”. In this case, the special effect is established and the special effect is executed at a higher rate when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” than when the variable display result is “losing”. It may be set so that.

  In this way, when the special effect is executed, it is not determined that the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, but it is expected to be controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state than when the special effect is not executed. What is necessary is just to raise a feeling and to improve the interest of the game. In other words, the special effect is informed of the effect result that the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state or normal open big hit state) or the small hit gaming state like the hit notification effect in the second embodiment. It may also include a case where an effect result is notified that the gaming state is not controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  For example, in the process of step S6070 shown in FIG. 47, when the pre-reading notice mode is the sudden notice mode or the 15R notice mode, the variation category at the time of starting winning a prize corresponds to “non-reach” or “super reach”. It is determined that the special performance condition is established at a rate of / 100. Alternatively, it is determined that the special performance condition is satisfied at a rate of 5/100 corresponding to the variation category at the time of the start winning is “non-reach”, while the variation category at the time of the start winning is corresponding to “super reach”. It may be determined that the special performance condition is established at a ratio of 50/100. In this way, for example, in the case of “Super Reach”, for example, where the reach effect of Super Reach is executed, the special effect is established and the special effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of “Non-reach”. Also good. In this case, after notifying the effect result that it is not controlled in the jackpot gaming state suggested in the rush prediction mode or the 15R notification mode, the special effect is executed in a predetermined effect mode, It is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the expectation of the specific display mode such that the variable display mode becomes the reach mode and the reach effect of super reach is executed. When it is determined that the variation display result is “losing” and it is determined that the special effect condition is not satisfied, the variation display that is executed by interruption is executed in the same manner as the processing of step S729 shown in FIG. The number of times may be added to the total number of executions of the prefetch notice effect. Alternatively, the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” may be canceled and returned to the normal effect mode.

  Alternatively, even when it is determined that when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning, it is determined that the same jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot gaming state suggested by the pre-reading notice mode, the predetermined ratio The special performance condition may be satisfied and the special performance may be executed. For example, in the process of step S6070 shown in FIG. 47, when the pre-reading advance notice mode is the sudden advance notice mode, the special effect condition is established at a rate of 10/100 corresponding to the variation category at the time of starting winning a prize. It is determined that Further, in this process, when the pre-reading notice mode is the 15R notice mode, it is determined that the special effect condition is established at a rate of 10/100 corresponding to the variation category at the time of starting winning is “big hit”. In this case, when the pre-reading advance notice mode (the sudden advance notice mode or the 15R notice mode) suggesting that there is a possibility of being controlled to a specific big hit game state such as a short-term open big hit state or a normal open big hit state, Corresponding to the fact that the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, even when the special effect is executed by informing the effect result in the pre-reading notice mode, the identification suggested in the pre-reading notice mode The big hit game state (short-term open big hit state or normal open big hit state) may be controlled. In this way, it is only necessary to increase the unexpectedness of the game or performance by executing the special performance and to improve the interest of the game.

  As described above, when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start winning prize, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special effect is performed at a different rate depending on the jackpot type. Good. That is, when a specific big hit gaming state (short-term open big hit state or normal open big hit state) is suggested corresponding to the pre-reading notice mode such as the sudden prediction mode or the 15R notice mode, the variation category at the time of starting winning is pre-reading notice. When the jackpot gaming state is different from the specific jackpot gaming state suggested in the mode, the special performance is always executed (at a decision rate of 100/100) to maintain the consistency of the contents of the rendering. On the other hand, if the variation category at the time of starting winning is the big hit gaming state that is the same as the specific big hit gaming state suggested in the pre-reading notice mode, the special effect may be executed or the special effect is not executed. By setting so that there is sometimes, it is possible to enhance the game and the unexpectedness of the game by executing the special effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Alternatively, when the variable display is interrupted and executed based on the occurrence of the second start prize, the fluctuation display result based on the occurrence of the second start prize (determination result as to whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state) Regardless of whether or not the special display is always executed (at a decision rate of 100/100), the variable display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is made before the variable display to be notified by the pre-read notification effect is started. You may make it maintain the consistency of production content, when interrupting and performing.

  The pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a specific jackpot gaming state such as a normal open big hit state or a short-term open big hit state is not limited to the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” such as the 15R notice mode or the sudden notice mode. For example, a pre-reading notice effect of “character display” by displaying an effect image indicating a predetermined character on the screen of the effect display device 5, a pre-reading notice effect of “special symbol” shown in the second embodiment, a plurality of times Any pre-reading notice effect that can be executed before the start of the variable display to be notified is started, such as a pre-reading notice effect of a “story effect” in which a predetermined story progresses over the variable display. Further, instead of the pre-reading notice effect by displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the effect display device 5, or together with the pre-reading notice effect by displaying the effect image, sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R, game effect The pre-reading notice effect is performed by any lighting device including the lighting operation of the lamp 9 and the decoration LED, the operation of the movable member provided inside or outside the game area, or a combination of some or all of them. Also good.

  In the second embodiment, when the variable display to be notified is started based on the establishment of the special effect condition, for example, based on the special effect pattern determined in the process of step S7322 shown in FIG. It demonstrated as a thing which alert | reports the production result that it is not controlled by the specific jackpot game state suggested by the mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display to be notified based on the establishment of the special effect condition, after notifying the effect result that is controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state suggested in the pre-read notice mode An effect result indicating that the jackpot gaming state is different from the jackpot gaming state suggested in the prefetching notice mode may be notified.

  As an example, after the display of fluctuation has progressed as shown in FIGS. 41A to 41H in the second embodiment, the second start winning as shown in FIG. 53B occurs once. Suppose that “big hit” is notified by the second start opening winning designation command. In this case, instead of the effect image as shown in FIG. 53 (E), the effect image as shown in FIG. 44 (C) is displayed to control the short-term open big hit state suggested in the sudden warning mode. An effect result similar to the case of being performed is notified. In addition, for example, a temporary stop display of a decorative pattern that becomes a short-term opening opportunity as shown in FIG. 44D, or a display of an effect image as shown in FIG. A similar effect result may be notified. However, even at this time, the special symbol variation display in the special figure game is continuously executed. Then, on the screen of the effect display device 5, the decorative symbol variation display is executed again (re-variable display), and after executing the special effects as shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to (C), FIG. 54 (D A definite decorative symbol or the like of a jackpot combination as shown in FIG.

  In this way, the performance result that is notified when the game is controlled to a big jackpot gaming state different from the specific jackpot gaming state suggested in the pre-reading advance notice mode clearly notifies that it is not controlled to the specific jackpot gaming state. It may also be a notification of the same effect as when the game is controlled to a specific jackpot gaming state.

  In the second embodiment, it has been described that when the second start winning is generated, it is determined whether or not a predetermined special effect condition is satisfied by executing the process of step S6070 shown in FIG. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable display based on the occurrence of the second start winning is started, it may be determined whether or not the special effect condition is satisfied. As an example, when it is determined by the processing in step S731 shown in FIG. 49 that it is not at the time of starting the mode transition notice, the pre-read notice mode is suggested based on the fluctuation display result notified by the fluctuation display result notification command. It is determined whether or not the game is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state different from a specific big hit game state. Then, based on the variation display result in the current variation display, when the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state different from the specific big hit gaming state suggested in the prefetching advance notice mode is controlled, the process of step S7322 is performed. Similarly, the setting for executing the special effect may be performed. Even if it does in this way, after starting execution of the pre-reading notice effect that becomes the pre-reading notice mode such as the sudden-notice notice mode or the 15R notice mode, the second start prize is generated before the variable display to be noticed is started. Based on the display result in the variable display based on the game, after the announcement result in the pre-reading advance notice mode when controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state different from the big hit gaming state suggested in the prefetching advance notice mode Then, it is possible to execute a special effect for notifying the effect result indicating that the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the second embodiment, it has been described that the special effect is executed by executing the process of step S7322 or the like when it is determined by the process of step S7321 shown in FIG. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the determination result that the special performance condition has been established based on the occurrence of the second start prize, the pre-reading notice is given before the variable display to be noticed is started. The special effect may be executed after notifying the effect result in the mode. As an example, when it is determined in step S7320 shown in FIG. 49 that the special effect flag is on, the process in step S7322 is executed regardless of whether or not the notice target is a variable display. The production may be set to be executable.

1 Pachinko machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Production image display device 5H Start winning memory display area 103 CPU
120 CPU for effect control
151A First reserved storage unit 151B Second reserved storage unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when a predetermined specific display result is derived as a display result,
Hold storage means for storing information relating to variable display that has not yet been started as hold storage;
Hold display means for displaying each hold storage stored in the hold storage means as hold information in a predetermined manner;
Specific determination means for determining whether or not the display result of variable display based on the hold storage stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result before the variable display based on the hold storage is started;
According to the determination result of the specific determination means, the hold information corresponding to the hold memory that is the determination target of the determination result is displayed in a special mode different from the predetermined mode. First notice executing means for executing a first notice for notifying the possibility that the specific display result is derived;
According to the determination result of the specific determination means, by performing a continuous effect over a plurality of variable displays before the variable display based on the hold memory that is the determination target of the determination result is performed, Second notice executing means for executing a second notice for giving a notice of the possibility that the specific display result is derived in variable display by holding storage;
With
The second notice execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting execution of the second notice before starting the second notice, and executing the suggestion effect during execution of the first notice. And the second notice can be executed even when the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted.
The gaming machine, wherein the second notice execution means does not execute a new second notice when the second notice is being executed. A prohibiting unit that prohibits execution of the first notice by the first notice executing unit and the second notice by the second notice executing unit;
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images